SERVICE MANUAL

Color Inkjet Printer

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/

R2000s/SC-P400 Series
 Notice:
 All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
 The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
 All effort have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would greatly appreciate being
informed of them.
 The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences thereof.
EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

General Notice:Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.

Copyright © 2011SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

 PRECAUTIONS
Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1)Personal injury and 2) damage to equipment.

DANGER Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in performing procedures preceded by
DANGER Headings.

WARNING Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.

The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.

DANGER
1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR
PROCEDURES.
2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR ALL ELECTRONICS
TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK.
3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL INSTRUCTED TO DO
SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON POWER SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC
COMPONENTS.
4. WHEN DISASSEMBLING OR ASSEMBLING A PRODUCT, MAKE SURE TO WEAR GLOVES TO AVOID INJURIER FROM METAL PARTS WITH SHARP EDGES.

WARNING
1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN.
2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/RATING PLATE. IF THE
EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT CONNECT IT TO THE POWER SOURCE.
3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR REPLACING PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS.
4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTI-STATIC WRIST
STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS.
5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS BY THE MANUFACTURE; INTRODUCTION OF SECOND-SOURCE ICs OR
OTHER NON-APPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE EPSON WARRANTY.
6. WHEN USING COMPRESSED AIR PRODUCTS; SUCH AS AIR DUSTER, FOR CLEANING DURING REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE, THE USE OF SUCH
PRODUCTS CONTAINING FLAMMABLE GAS IS PROHIBITED.
 About This Manual
About This Manual: This manual is made for the sole purpose of providing necessary information in order that a serviceperson qualified by Epson performs his / her appropriate
repair / maintenance for the applicable Epson’s products. You shall not use this manual out of this purpose.
This manual is Epson’s confidential information. When you use this manual, you shall hold it in strict confidence and shall not disclose to any third party without prior consent of
Epson.
This manual describes basic functions, theory of electrical and mechanical operations, maintenance and repair procedures of the printer. The instructions and procedures included
herein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the precautions on the preceding page.

Manual Configuration Symbols Used in this Manual

This manual consists of six chapters and Appendix. Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional
CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a
Provides a general overview and specifications of the product. procedure or an action. Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and always read
CHAPTER 2.OPERATING PRINCIPLES NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING messages.
Describes the theory of electrical and mechanical operations of the
product. Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition
CHAPTER 3.TROUBLESHOOTING that is necessary to keep the product’s quality.
Describes the step-by-step procedures for the troubleshooting.
CHAPTER 4.DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY
Describes the step-by-step procedures for disassembling and assembling
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition
the product.
that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of,
CHAPTER 5.ADJUSTMENT
equipment.
Provides Epson-approved methods for adjustment.
CHAPTER 6.MAINTENANCE
Provides preventive maintenance procedures and the lists of Epson- May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or
approved lubricants and adhesives required for servicing the product. condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may also
APPENDIX Provides the following additional information for reference: provide additional information that is related to a specific subject, or
• Connector pin assignments comment on the results achieved through a previous action.
Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s
Provides information of Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition
that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss of life.

Indicates that a particular task must be carried out according to a certain

standard after disassembly and before re-assembly, otherwise the
quality of the components in question may be adversely affected.
 Revision Status
Revision Date of Issue Description
A October 20, 2007 First Release
B February 29, 2008 Revised Contents
 4.4.4Lower Housing / Printer Mechanism(p98)
Disassembly procedure is revised.
 4.4.8Waste Ink Pad / Waste Ink Tube Left/Right(p112)
Description and figure are revised.
 6.1.2.2Maintenance Request(p165)
Description is revised.
C April 25, 2008 Revised Contents
Descriptions about Stylus Photo R2880 are added.
 Chapter 1
 Descriptions have been added in 1.1.1Features(p12).
 Made changes in Table 1-1"Printer Specifications"(p 13).
 Made changes in Table 1-2"Product No. of Ink Cartridges"(p 13).
 Table 1-6"Print Mode (Color)"(p 16) has been added.
 Table 1-7"Print Mode (Monochrome)"(p 17) has been added.
 Made changes in Table 1-8"Supported Paper"(p 18).
 Made changes in Table 1-9"Printing Area (Margins)"(p 22).
 Table 1-10"Printing Area (Margins)"(p 22) has been added.
 Made changes in Table 1-12"Device ID"(p 23).
 Made changes in Table 1-13"Primary Power Specifications"(p 23).
 Made changes in Table 1-17"Operation Button Functions"(p 26).
 Figure 1-6, "Nozzle Check Pattern (Stylus Photo R2880)" (p 27) has been added.
 Made changes in Table 1-18"Indicators (LEDs) Function"(p 28).
 Made changes in Table 1-19"Errors & Remedies"(p 29).
 Chapter 2
 Figure 2-3, "Nozzle Arrangement (Stylus Photo R2880)" (p 32) has been added.
 Made changes in Table 2-3"Nozzle Lines and the Corresponding Ink Color (Stylus Photo R2880)"(p 32).
Revision Date of Issue Description
C April 25, 2008  Chapter 3
 Made changes in Table 3-1"List of Error Messages"(p 36).
 Table 3-10"Troubleshooting of Ink Color Error (Stylus Photo R2880 only)"(p 50) has been added.
 Made changes in Table 3-13"Troubleshooting of Maintenance Request"(p 52).
 Chapter 4
 “CHECK POINT” has been added in Figure 4-6, "Disassembly Flowchart" (p 77).
 4.2.5Panel Unit(p80) has been added.
 “ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED” has been added in 4.2.7Upper Housing / Printer Cover(p83)
 “ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED” has been added in 4.3.3High Voltage Module(p89)
 Made changes in 4.4.4Lower Housing / Printer Mechanism(p98).
 Chapter 5
 Made changes in 5.1.1Servicing Adjustment Item List(p140).
 Made changes in 5.1.2 Replacement Part-Based Adjustment Priorities (p142).
 Made changes in 5.1.3Required Adjustment Tools(p145).
 Made changes in 5.2.2PG Adjustment(p147).
 Made changes in 5.2.4Colorimetric Calibration(p155).
 Chapter 6
 Made changes in 6.1.2Service Maintenance(p164).
 Made changes in 6.1.3Lubrication(p166).
D December 18, 2009 Revised Contents
 Chapter 1
 Made changes in Table 1-10"Printing Area (Margins)"(p 22).
 Chapter 4
 Made changes in 4.4.6ASF Assy(p108).
 Chapter 5
 Made changes in 5.1.1Servicing Adjustment Item List(p140).
 Made changes in 5.1.2Required Adjustments(p143).
 5.2.5ASF Guide Roller LDs Position Adjustment(p161) has been added.
E April 11, 2011 Added Chapter
 Chapter 8
F May 2, 2014 Added “EPSON Stylus Photo R2000s”
Revision Date of Issue Description
G March 31, 2015  Chapter 4
 “WARNING” has been added in 4.1.1Precautions(p72).
 Chapter 5
 “COUTION” has been added in 5.1.3Required Adjustment Tools(p145).
H October 13, 2015 Added Chapter 9 for SC-P400 Series.
I January 26,2017  Chapter 9
 Made changes in 9.3Errors/Fatal Errors and Remedies(p204).
 Contents
Chapter 1 Product Description 3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 36
3.1.1 Troubleshooting according to Error Messages .......................................... 36
1.1 Product Description ............................................................................................. 12 3.1.2 Troubleshooting based on Observed Faults .............................................. 62
1.1.1 Features ...................................................................................................... 12
1.2 Printing Specifications......................................................................................... 13 Chapter 4 Disassembly And Assembly
1.2.1 Basic Specifications ................................................................................... 13
1.2.2 Ink Cartridge .............................................................................................. 13 4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 72
1.2.3 Print Mode ................................................................................................. 14 4.1.1 Precautions ................................................................................................ 72
1.2.4 Supported Paper ......................................................................................... 18 4.1.2 Tools .......................................................................................................... 73
1.2.5 Printing Area ............................................................................................. 22 4.1.3 Screws ....................................................................................................... 73
1.3 Interface............................................................................................................... 23 4.1.4 Making a Special Tool for CSIC Board .................................................... 73
4.1.5 Work Completion Checklist ...................................................................... 74
1.4 General Specifications......................................................................................... 23
4.1.6 Locking/Unlocking the Carriage and Opening/Closing the CDR Tray Base
1.4.1 Electrical Specifications ............................................................................ 23
75
1.4.2 Environmental Conditions ......................................................................... 24
4.1.7 Disassembly ............................................................................................... 77
1.4.3 Durability ................................................................................................... 24
1.4.4 Acoustic Noise ........................................................................................... 24 4.2 Removing the Housings ...................................................................................... 78
1.4.5 Safety Approvals (Safety standards/EMI) ................................................. 24 4.2.1 Paper Support Assy ................................................................................... 78
4.2.2 Stacker Assy .............................................................................................. 78
1.5 Operation Buttons & Indicators (LEDs).............................................................. 25
4.2.3 Front Decoration Plate Left/Right ............................................................. 79
1.5.1 Operation Buttons ...................................................................................... 25
4.2.4 Rear Housing ............................................................................................. 79
1.5.2 Indicators (LEDs) ...................................................................................... 25
4.2.5 Panel Unit .................................................................................................. 80
1.5.3 Operation Buttons & LEDs Functions ...................................................... 26
4.2.6 Decoration Plate Left/Right ....................................................................... 82
1.5.4 Errors & Remedies .................................................................................... 29
4.2.7 Upper Housing / Printer Cover .................................................................. 83
4.2.8 Upper Housing Support Assy .................................................................... 85
Chapter 2 Operating Principles 4.3 Removing the Boards .......................................................................................... 86
2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 31 4.3.1 Board Assy (Main Board/Power Supply Board) ....................................... 86
4.3.2 LED Board ................................................................................................ 88
2.2 Printer Mechanism............................................................................................... 31
4.3.3 High Voltage Module ................................................................................ 89
2.3 Printhead Specifications ...................................................................................... 32
4.4 Disassembling the Printer Mechanism ................................................................ 91
2.4 PG Setting............................................................................................................ 33 4.4.1 APG Assy .................................................................................................. 91
2.5 Motors & Sensors ................................................................................................ 34 4.4.2 CR Scale .................................................................................................... 92
4.4.3 Printhead / CSIC Assy ............................................................................... 94
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting 4.4.4 Lower Housing / Printer Mechanism ........................................................ 98
4.4.5 Carriage Shaft / Carriage Unit ................................................................. 100
 4.4.6 ASF Assy . ................................................................................................ 108 Chapter 6 Maintenance
4.4.7 Front Paper Guide Pad . ............................................................................ 111
4.4.8 Waste Ink Pad / Waste Ink Tube Left/Right . .......................................... 112 6.1 Overview . .......................................................................................................... 164
4.4.9 Foot . ......................................................................................................... 113 6.1.1 Cleaning . .................................................................................................. 164
4.4.10 PictBridge Holder Assy . ........................................................................ 113 6.1.2 Service Maintenance . .............................................................................. 164
4.4.11 Paper EJ Frame Assy / Front Cover / CDR Tray Base .......................... 114 6.1.3 Lubrication . ............................................................................................. 166
4.4.12 CDR Release Lever Sub Assy . .............................................................. 116
4.4.13 Ink System Unit . .................................................................................... 118 Chapter 7 Appendix
4.4.14 Front Paper Guide / Paper EJ Roller /
Front Paper Guide Pad Tray . ............................................................................ 121 7.1 Connector Summary. ......................................................................................... 173
4.4.15 PF Roller Shaft . ..................................................................................... 124 7.2 Exploded Diagram / Parts List . ......................................................................... 173
4.4.16 Release Holder Assy . ............................................................................. 127
4.4.17 FLAG Release Assy . ............................................................................. 128 Chapter 8 Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s
4.4.18 Upper Paper Guide Assys . ..................................................................... 129
4.5 Removing the Motors . ....................................................................................... 131 8.1 Product Description . .......................................................................................... 175
4.5.1 CR Motor . ................................................................................................ 131 8.2 Features . ............................................................................................................ 176
4.5.2 PF Motor . ................................................................................................. 132 8.2.1 Casing specifications . .............................................................................. 176
4.5.3 ASF Motor . .............................................................................................. 133 8.2.2 Network Interface . ................................................................................... 177
4.6 Removing the Sensors . ...................................................................................... 134 8.2.3 Ink Cartridge . ........................................................................................... 179
4.6.1 CR Encoder . ............................................................................................ 134 8.2.4 Nozzle Configuration . ............................................................................. 180
4.6.2 PF Encoder . ............................................................................................. 134 8.2.5 Ink Scrambling Sequence . ....................................................................... 180
4.6.3 Ink Mark Sensor / PW sensor . ................................................................. 135 8.2.6 Operation Buttons & Indicators (LEDs) . ................................................ 181
4.6.4 CDR Sensor . ............................................................................................ 136 8.3 Disassembly. ...................................................................................................... 185
4.6.5 PE Sensor Holder . ................................................................................... 137 8.3.1 Summary . ................................................................................................ 185
4.6.6 Cover Open Sensor . ................................................................................. 138 8.3.2 Procedure of Disassembly . ...................................................................... 186
8.4 Adjustment . ....................................................................................................... 192
Chapter 5 Adjustment 8.4.1 Summary . ................................................................................................ 192
8.4.2 Servicing Adjustment Item List (For Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s) . ...... 192
8.4.3 Required Adjustments . ............................................................................ 193
5.1 Adjustment Items and Overview . ...................................................................... 140
8.4.4 Adjustment Procedure . ............................................................................ 195
5.1.1 Servicing Adjustment Item List . .............................................................. 140
5.1.2 Required Adjustments . ............................................................................ 143
5.1.3 Required Adjustment Tools . .................................................................... 145 Chapter 9 SC-P400 Series
5.2 Adjustment . ....................................................................................................... 146
5.2.1 PF Belt Tension Adjustment . .................................................................. 146 9.1 Product Description . .......................................................................................... 200
5.2.2 PG Adjustment . ....................................................................................... 147 9.2 Features . ............................................................................................................ 200
5.2.3 PF Roller Shaft Center Support Position Adjustment ............................. 151 9.2.1 Difference from Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s in servicing . .................... 200
5.2.4 Colorimetric Calibration . ......................................................................... 155 9.2.2 Appearance . ............................................................................................. 200
5.2.5 ASF Guide Roller LDs Position Adjustment .......................................... 161 9.2.3 Ink Cartridge . ........................................................................................... 201
9.2.4 Operation Buttons & Indicators (LEDs) . ................................................ 201
9.3 Errors/Fatal Errors and Remedies . .................................................................... 204
9.4 Disassembly. ...................................................................................................... 207
9.4.1 Summary . ................................................................................................. 207
9.4.2 Procedure of Disassembly . ...................................................................... 208
9.5 Adjustment . ....................................................................................................... 211
9.5.1 Overview . ................................................................................................ 211
9.5.2 Servicing Adjustment Item List . .............................................................. 211
9.5.3 Required Adjustments . ............................................................................ 215
9.5.4 Adjustment Procedure . ............................................................................ 218
 CHAPTER

1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

1.1 Product Description  Dimensions

 Dimensions: 616 mm (W) x 322 mm (D) x 214 mm (H)
(Paper support and stacker are closed. Rubber feet are included)
1.1.1 Features  Weight: 12.2 kg (Stylus Photo R1900)
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s is a color ink-jet printer that 12.3 kg (Stylus Photo R2880)
supports A3+ size. (without ink cartridges, CDR Tray, Roll paper holders and
Single sheet guide)
The main features are;

 High speed & High quality

 Maximum print resolution: SMGA 5760 (H) x 1440 (V) dpi
 F8 Mach print head are mounted.
 Newly developed pigment ink cartridges enable high quality photo printing.
 CD and DVD label printing are supported.
 High-speed borderless printing is available.
 Direct printing (PictBridge)
 Two USB ports for PC connection Paper Support & Stacker are Closed
 New exterior design
 Control panel
Simple design with four buttons and three indicators (LED).
 Differences between Stylus Photo R1900 and Stylus Photo R2880
Stylus Photo R2880 is designed based on the Stylus Photo R1900 printer
mechanism, however, there are some differences between them such as ink color
configuration. The table below lists the major differences.

Item Stylus Photo R1900 Stylus Photo R2880

Photo Black, Matte Black, Photo Black, Matte Black, Light
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, Light Light Black, Cyan,
Ink colors
Red, Orange, Gloss Light Cyan, Vivid Magenta, Vivid
Optimizer Light Magenta, Yellow
Simultaneous
installation of Photo
Supported Not supported
Black and Matte Black
cartridges
Board paper printing Not supported Supported Paper Support & Stacker are Opened

Print Mode 4 modes 5 modes Figure 1-1. External View

Product Description Product Description 12

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

1.2 Printing Specifications 1.2.2 Ink Cartridge

The product numbers of the EPSON ink cartridges for this printer are shown below.
1.2.1 Basic Specifications
Table 1-2. Product No. of Ink Cartridges
Table 1-1. Printer Specifications Code
Item Specifications Color
Stylus Photo R1900 Stylus Photo R2880
Print method On-demand ink jet Photo Black T0871 T0961
Nozzle configuration  Stylus Photo R1900 Matte Black T0878 T0968
Black: 180 nozzles x 2 (Photo Black, Matte Black) Light Black -- T0967
Color: 180 nozzles x 5 Light Light Black -- T0969
(Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Red, Orange)
Cyan T0872 T0962
Gross Optimizer:
Light Cyan -- T0965
180 nozzles x 1
Magenta T0873 --
 Stylus Photo R2880
Black*1: 180 nozzles x 1 (Photo Black, Matte Black) Vivid Magenta -- T0963
Gray: 180 nozzles x 2 (Light Black, Light Light Black) Vivid Light Magenta -- T0966
Color: 180 nozzles x 5 Yellow T0874 T0964
(Cyan, Light Cyan, Vivid Magenta, Vivid Light Orange T0879 --
Magenta, Yellow) Red T0877 --
Print direction Bi-directional minimum distance printing, unidirectional printing Gloss Optimizer T0870 --
Print resolution Horizontal x Vertical (dpi)
• 360 x 180*2 • 1440 x 720  Shelf life
• 360 x 360 • SMGA 5760 x 1440 Two years from production date (if unopened), six months after opening package.
• 720 x 720 • 1440 x 1440 (Stylus Photo R2880 only)
Control code • ESC/P Raster command  Storage Temperature
• ESC/P-R (RGB) command Table 1-3. Storage Temperature
• EPSON Remote command Situation Storage Temperature Limit
Internal font Character code:Alphanumeric with expanded graphics (PC437)
-20 oC to 40 oC
ASCII, 20H to 7FH only When stored in individual boxes
(-4oF to 104oF)
Font: EPSON original font 1 month max. at 40 oC (104oF)
-20 oC to 40 oC
Alphanumeric font: Courier When installed in main unit
(-4oF to 104oF)
Input buffer size T.B.D. Kbytes
Paper feed method Friction feed, using one ASF (Auto Sheet Feeder)  Dimension
Paper path 2-way feed 12.7 mm (W) x 68 mm (D) x 47 mm (H)
Paper feed rates 170 msec (at 25.4 mm feed)  The ink cartridge cannot be refilled.
C A U T I O
PF interval Programmable in 0.01764 mm (1/1440 inch) steps  Do not use expired ink cartridges.
Note *1: Stylus Photo R2880 has only one slot for black ink cartridge. Switching between the  The ink in the ink cartridge freezes at -16 °C (3.2 oF). It takes
Photo Black and Matte Black can be made by replacing the cartridge. about three hours under 25 °C (77oF) until the ink thaws and
*2: Stylus Photo R2880 does not support the resolution. becomes usable.

Product Description Printing Specifications 13

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

1.2.3 Print Mode Table 1-4. Print Mode (Color)

Print Resolution Dot Size Micro
 Stylus Photo R1900 Media Bi-d
Mode (H x V) dpi (cps*) Weave
Table 1-4. Print Mode (Color) • Archival Matte Paper (EAI) VSD2
Photo 1440x720 ON ON
Print Resolution Dot Size Micro • Enhanced Matte Paper (others) (200cps)
Media Bi-d
Mode (H x V) dpi (cps*) Weave Super VSD3
5760x1440 ON ON
• Plain paper Draft/ Eco Photo (200cps)
360x360 ON OFF
• Premium Bright White Paper Economy (240cps) • Double-sided Matte Paper VSD2
Photo 1440x720 ON ON
(EAI) (200cps)
VSD1,2
• Bright White Inkjet Paper Fine 720x720 ON ON Super VSD3
(220cps) 5760x1440 ON ON
(others) Photo (200cps)
• Premium Photo Paper Glossy VSD1,2 • Presentation Paper Matte
Fine 720x720 ON ON
(EAI) (220cps) (EAI) VSD2
• Premium Glossy Photo Paper Photo 1440x720 ON ON
VSD2 • Photo Quality Inkjet Paper (200cps)
(others) Photo 1440x720 ON ON
(200cps) (others)
• Premium Photo Paper Semi-
• Watercolor Paper - Radiant Super VSD3
gloss (EAI) Super VSD3 5760x1440 ON ON
5760x1440 ON ON White Photo (200cps)
• Premium Semigloss Photo Photo (200cps)
Paper (others) • Velvet Fine Art Paper Super VSD3
5760x1440 ON ON
Photo (200cps)
• Premium Luster Photo Paper VSD1,2
Fine 720x720 ON ON • Ultra Smooth Fine Art Paper Super VSD3
(220cps) 5760x1440 ON ON
Photo (200cps)
VSD2
Photo 1440x720 ON ON • PremierArt Matte Scrapbook VSD2
(200cps) Photo 1440x720 ON ON
Photo Paper (200cps)
Super VSD3
5760x1440 ON ON Super VSD3
Photo (200cps) 5760x1440 ON ON
Photo (200cps)
• Photo Paper Glossy (EAI) VSD1,2
Fine 720x720 ON ON • CD/DVD Super VSD3
• Glossy Photo Paper (others) (220cps) 5760x1440 ON ON
Photo (200cps)
VSD2
Photo 1440x720 ON ON • CD/DVD Premium Surface Super VSD3
(200cps) 5760x1440 ON ON
Photo (200cps)
Super VSD3
5760x1440 ON ON
Photo (200cps)
Note : The default is indicated by boldface.
• Premium Presentation Paper VSD2
Photo 1440x720 ON ON Note * : cps = character per second
Matte (EAI) (200cps)
• Matte Paper Heavy-weight Super VSD3
(others) 5760x1440 ON ON
Photo (200cps)

Product Description Printing Specifications 14

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 1-5. Print Mode (Monochrome) Table 1-5. Print Mode (Monochrome)
Print Resolution Dot Size Micro Print Resolution Dot Size Micro
Media Bi-d Media Bi-d
Mode (H x V) dpi (cps*) Weave Mode (H x V) dpi (cps*) Weave

• Plain paper Draft/ Eco • Double-sided Matte Paper VSD2

360x180 ON OFF Photo 1440x720 ON ON
• Premium Bright White Paper Economy (240cps) (200cps)
(EAI) Super VSD3
VSD1,2 5760x1440 ON ON
• Bright White Inkjet Paper Fine 720x720 ON ON Photo (200cps)
(220cps)
(others) • Presentation Paper Matte
• Premium Photo Paper Glossy VSD1,2 (EAI) VSD2
Fine 720x720 ON ON Photo 1440x720 ON ON
(EAI) (220cps) • Photo Quality Inkjet Paper (200cps)
• Premium Glossy Photo Paper VSD2 (others)
(others) Photo 1440x720 ON ON
(200cps) • Watercolor Paper - Radiant Super VSD3
• Premium Photo Paper Semi- 5760x1440 ON ON
White Photo (200cps)
gloss (EAI) Super VSD3
5760x1440 ON ON • Velvet Fine Art Paper Super VSD3
• Premium Semigloss Photo Photo (200cps) 5760x1440 ON ON
Photo (200cps)
Paper (others)
• Ultra Smooth Fine Art Paper Super VSD3
• Premium Luster Photo Paper VSD1,2 5760x1440 ON ON
Fine 720x720 ON ON Photo (200cps)
(220cps)
• PremierArt Matte Scrapbook VSD2
VSD2 Photo 1440x720 ON ON
Photo 1440x720 ON ON Photo Paper (200cps)
(200cps)
Super VSD3
Super VSD3 5760x1440 ON ON
5760x1440 ON ON Photo (200cps)
Photo (200cps)
• CD/DVD Super VSD3
• Photo Paper Glossy (EAI) VSD1,2 5760x1440 ON ON
Fine 720x720 ON ON Photo (200cps)
• Glossy Photo Paper (others) (220cps)
• CD/DVD Premium Surface Super VSD3
VSD2 5760x1440 ON ON
Photo 1440x720 ON ON Photo (200cps)
(200cps)
Super VSD3 Note : The default is indicated by boldface.
5760x1440 ON ON
Photo (200cps)
Note * : cps = character per second
• Premium Presentation Paper VSD2
Photo 1440x720 ON ON
Matte (EAI) (200cps)
• Matte Paper Heavy-weight Super VSD3
(others) 5760x1440 ON ON
Photo (200cps)
• Archival Matte Paper (EAI) VSD2
Photo 1440x720 ON ON
• Enhanced Matte Paper (others) (200cps)
Super VSD3
5760x1440 ON ON
Photo (200cps)

Product Description Printing Specifications 15

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

 Stylus Photo R2880 Table 1-6. Print Mode (Color)

Resolution Dot Size Micro
Table 1-6. Print Mode (Color) Media Print Mode Bi-d
(H x V) dpi (cps*) Weave
Resolution Dot Size Micro • PremierArt Matte VSD2
Media Print Mode Bi-d Photo 1440x720 ON ON
(H x V) dpi (cps*) Weave Scrapbook Photo Paper (220cps)
• Plain paper Economy (EAI only) VSD2
Draft/Economy 360x360 ON OFF Super Photo 5760x1440 ON ON
• Premium Bright White (240cps) (220cps)
Paper (EAI) • CD/DVD VSD3
VSD2 Super Photo 1440x1440 ON ON
• Bright White Inkjet Fine 720x720 ON ON (220cps)
(220cps)
Paper (others) • CD/DVD Premium VSD3
• Ultra Premium Glossy VSD2 Super Photo 1440x1440 ON ON
Super Photo 5760x1440 ON ON Surface (220cps)
Photo Paper (220cps)
• EPSON Glossy Photo VSD2 Note : The default is indicated by boldface.
Fine 720x720 ON ON
Paper (220cps)
Note * : cps = character per second
• Premium Semigloss VSD2
Photo Paper Photo 1440x720 ON ON
(220cps)
• Ultra Premium Photo
Paper Luster
VSD2
• Glossy Photo Paper Super Photo 5760x1440 ON ON
(220cps)
Photo Paper Glossy
(EAI)
• Matte Paper VSD2
Photo 1440x720 ON ON
Heavyweight (220cps)
• Double-sided Matte VSD2
Super Photo 5760x1440 ON ON
Paper (220cps)
• Photo Quality Inkjet VSD2
Photo 1440x720 ON ON
Paper (220cps)
• Watercolor Paper - VSD2
Photo 1440x720 ON ON
Radiant White (220cps)
• Velvet Fine Art Paper
• Ultra Smooth Fine Art
Paper
• Enhanced Matte Paper
• Archival matte paper VSD2
Super Photo 5760x1440 ON ON
(EAI) (220cps)
• Matte Paper
Heavyweight
• Double-sided Matte
Paper

Product Description Printing Specifications 16

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 1-7. Print Mode (Monochrome) Table 1-7. Print Mode (Monochrome)
Resolution Dot Size Micro Resolution Dot Size Micro
Media Print Mode Bi-d Media Print Mode Bi-d
(H x V) dpi (cps*) Weave (H x V) dpi (cps*) Weave
• Plain paper Economy • PremierArt Matte VSD2
Draft/Economy 360x360 ON OFF Photo 1440x720 ON ON
• Premium Bright White (240cps) Scrapbook Photo Paper (220cps)
Paper (EAI) (EAI only) VSD2
VSD2 Super Photo 5760x1440 ON ON
• Bright White Inkjet Fine 720x720 ON ON (220cps)
(220cps)
Paper (others) • CD/DVD VSD3
Super Photo 1440x1440 ON ON
• Ultra Premium Glossy VSD2 (220cps)
Super Photo 5760x1440 ON ON • CD/DVD Premium VSD3
Photo Paper (220cps) Super Photo 1440x1440 ON ON
• EPSON Glossy Photo VSD2 Surface (220cps)
Fine 720x720 ON ON
Paper (220cps)
Note : The default is indicated by boldface.
• Premium Semigloss VSD2
Photo Paper Photo 1440x720 ON ON
(220cps) Note * : cps = character per second
• Ultra Premium Photo
Paper Luster
VSD2
• Glossy Photo Paper Super Photo 5760x1440 ON ON
(220cps)
Photo Paper Glossy
(EAI)
• Matte Paper VSD2
Photo 1440x720 ON ON
Heavyweight (220cps)
• Double-sided Matte VSD2
Super Photo 5760x1440 ON ON
Paper (220cps)
• Photo Quality Inkjet VSD2
Photo 1440x720 ON ON
Paper (220cps)
• Watercolor Paper - VSD2
Photo 1440x720 ON ON
Radiant White (220cps)
• Velvet Fine Art Paper
• Ultra Smooth Fine Art
Paper
• Enhanced Matte Paper
• Archival matte paper VSD2
Super Photo 5760x1440 ON ON
(EAI) (220cps)
• Matte Paper
Heavyweight
• Double-sided Matte
Paper

Product Description Printing Specifications 17

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

1.2.4 Supported Paper

The table below lists the paper type and sizes supported by the printer. The Supported paper type and sizes vary depending on destinations (between EAI, EUR, and Asia).

Table 1-8. Supported Paper

Thickness Weight EAI EUR Asia
Paper Name Paper Size
mm g/m2 lb. P*1 B*2 P*1 B*2 P*1 B*2

A3 297 x 420 mm Y - Y - Y -

US B 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11” x 17”) Y - - - - -

B4 257 x 364 mm Y - Y - Y -

Legal 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5”x14”) Y - Y - Y -

Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”) Y - Y - Y -

A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) Y - Y - Y -

Plain paper 0.08-0.11 64-90 17-24
B5 182 x 257 mm (7.2”x10.1”) - - Y - Y -

A5 148 x 210 mm (5.8”x8.3”) - - Y - Y -

Half Letter 139.7 x 215.9 mm (5.5”x8.5”) Y - - - - -

A6 105 x 148 mm (4.1”x5.8”) Y - Y - Y -

89 x 127- 329 x 1117.6 mm

User Defined Y - Y - Y -
(3.56”x 5.08” - 13.16”x44.7”)

Premium Inkjet Plain Paper A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) 0.11 80 21 - - Y - Y -

Premium Bright White Paper Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”) 0.11 90 24 Y - - - - -

Bright White Inkjet Paper A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) 0.13 92.5 25 - - Y - Y -

Product Description Printing Specifications 18

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 1-8. Supported Paper

Thickness Weight EAI EUR Asia
Paper Name Paper Size
mm g/m2 lb. P*1 B*2 P*1 B*2 P*1 B*2

A3+/SuperA3 329 x 483 mm Y Y Y Y Y Y

US B 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11” x 17”) Y Y - - - -

A3 297 x 420 mm Y Y Y Y Y Y

11” x 14” 279.4 x 355.6 mm Y Y - - - -

Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”) Y Y - - - -

Premium Photo Paper Glossy (EAI)
A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) 0.27 255 68 Y Y Y Y Y Y
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (others)
8” x 10” 203.2 x 254 mm Y Y - - - -

5” x 7” 127 x 178 mm Y Y Y Y Y Y
4” x 6” 101.6 x 152.4 mm Y Y Y Y Y Y

16:9 wide 102 x 181 mm (4”x7.11”) - - Y Y - -

Roll paper 329 x 1,000 mm Y Y Y Y Y Y

A3+/SuperA3 329 x 483 mm Y Y - - - -

US B 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11” x 17”) Y Y - - - -

Photo Paper Glossy (EAI) Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”) Y Y - - - -

0.25 258 68
Glossy Photo Paper (others) A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) Y Y Y Y Y Y

5” x 7” 127 x 178 mm Y*3 Y*3 Y Y Y*3 Y*3

4” x 6” 101.6 x 152.4 mm Y Y Y Y Y Y

A3+/SuperA3 329 x 483 mm Y Y Y Y Y Y

A3 297 x 420 mm Y Y Y Y Y Y

Premium Photo Paper Semi-gloss (EAI) Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”) Y Y - - - -

0.27 250 66
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (others) A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) - - Y Y Y Y

4” x 6” 101.6 x 152.4 mm Y Y Y Y Y Y

Roll paper 329 x 1,000 mm - - Y Y Y Y

Product Description Printing Specifications 19

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 1-8. Supported Paper

Thickness Weight EAI EUR Asia
Paper Name Paper Size
mm g/m2 lb. P*1 B*2 P*1 B*2 P*1 B*2

A3+/SuperA3 329 x 483 mm Y Y - - - -

A3 297 x 420 mm Y Y - - - -
Ultra Premium Photo Paper Luster 0.27 250 66
Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”) Y Y - - - -

Roll paper 329 x 1,000 mm Y Y - - - -

Roll paper 329 x 1,000 mm Y*4 Y*4 - - - -

Premium Luster Photo Paper 0.27 250 66
Roll paper 210 x 10,000 mm Y*4 Y*4 - - - -

A3+/SuperA3 329 x 483 mm Y Y Y Y Y Y

A3 297 x 420 mm Y Y Y Y Y Y

Premium Presentation Paper Matte (EAI) 11” x 14” 279.4 x 355.6 mm Y Y - - - -

0.23 167 44
Matte Paper Heavy-weight (others) Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”) Y Y - - - -

A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) - - Y Y Y Y

8” x 10” 203.2 x 254 mm Y Y - - - -

A3+/SuperA3 329 x 483 mm Y Y Y Y Y Y

Archival Matte Paper (EAI) A3 297 x 420 mm Y Y Y Y Y Y

0.26 192
Enhanced Matte Paper (others) Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”) Y Y - - - -

A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) - - Y Y Y Y

Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”) Y - - - - -

Double-sided Matte Paper 0.22 185 49
A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) - - Y - Y -

A3+/SuperA3 329 x 483 mm Y - Y - Y -

A3 297 x 420 mm Y - Y - Y -
Presentation Paper Matte (EAI)
US B 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11” x 17”) 0.12 102 27 Y - - - - -
Photo Quality Inkjet Paper (others)
Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”) Y - - - - -

A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) Y - Y - Y -

Watercolor Paper - Radiant White A3+/SuperA3 329 x 483 mm 0.29 190 51 Y Y Y Y Y Y

Product Description Printing Specifications 20

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 1-8. Supported Paper

Thickness Weight EAI EUR Asia
Paper Name Paper Size
mm g/m2 lb. P*1 B*2 P*1 B*2 P*1 B*2

A3+/SuperA3 329 x 483 mm Y Y Y Y - -

Velvet Fine Art Paper 0.48 260 69
Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5”x11”) Y Y - - - -

Ultra Smooth Fine Art Paper A3+/SuperA3 329 x 483 mm 0.46 325 86 Y Y - - - -

PremierArt Matte Scrapbook Photo Paper 12” x12” 305 x 305 mm 0.30 205 52 Y*5 Y*5 - - - -

Photo Quality Self Adhesive Sheet A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3”x11.7”) 0.19 167 44 Y - Y - Y -

CD/DVD ø 12cm ø 12cm - - Y - Y - Y -

CD/DVD Premium Surface ø 8cm ø 8cm - - Y - Y - Y -

Enhanced Matte Posterboard*6 A3+ 329 x 483 mm 1.2 - - Y*5 - - -

Note *1: “Y” in the “P” column stands for “the paper type/size is Supported”.
*2: “Y” in the “B” column stands for “Borderless printing is available”.
*3: Stylus Photo R2880 only.
*4: Not supported by Stylus Photo R2880.
*5: Guaranteed under certain conditions.
*6: Only front manual feed is available.

C A U T I

O
Make sure the paper is not wrinkled, fluffed, torn, or folded.
 The curve of paper must be 5 mm or below.
 When printing on an envelope, be sure the flap is folded neatly.
 Do not use the adhesive envelopes.
 Do not use double envelopes and cellophane window envelopes.

Product Description Printing Specifications 21

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

1.2.5 Printing Area

Cut Sheet (Standard) Cut Sheet (Borderless)
The printing area for this printer is shown below.
LM RM LM RM
 Stylus Photo R1900
Table 1-9. Printing Area (Margins) TM TM
Margin
Print Mode Paper Size
Left (LM) Right (RM) Top (TM) Bottom (BM)
Standard print Any size 3 mm 3 mm 3 mm 3 mm Print Area Print Area
Roll paper 3 mm* 3 mm* 30 mm* 21 mm*
Borderless A3/A3+/SuperA3 3.5 mm* 3.5 mm* 3 mm* 4.52 mm*
print
A4/Letter to 5” x 7” 2.5 mm* 2.5 mm* 3 mm* 4.02 mm*
BM
4” x 6” 2.54 mm* 2.54 mm* 1.34 mm* 2.54 mm*
Roll paper 0 mm 0 mm 30 mm 21 mm Paper Size BM

 Stylus Photo R2880 Paper Feed Direction

Table 1-10. Printing Area (Margins)

Figure 1-2. Printing Area
Margin
Print Mode Paper Size
Left (LM) Right (RM) Top (TM) Bottom (BM)
Standard print Any size 3 mm 3 mm 3 mm 3 mm
Roll paper 3 mm 3 mm 40 mm 21 mm
Board paper 3 mm 3 mm 20 mm 20 mm
Borderless A3/A3+/SuperA3 3.5 mm* 3.5 mm* 3 mm* 4.52 mm*
print
A4/Letter to 5” x 7” 2.5 mm* 2.5 mm* 1.34 mm* 2.54 mm*
4” x 6” 2.54 mm* 2.54 mm* 1.34 mm* 2.54 mm*
Roll paper 0 mm 0 mm 40 mm 21 mm
Note * : The margins for Borderless print are margins that bleed off the edges of paper.

Product Description Printing Specifications 22

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

1.3 Interface 1.4 General Specifications

This printer has two USB device ports on the rear side to connect the printer with
computers or the like, and one USB host port on the front side to connect an external 1.4.1 Electrical Specifications
device such as a DSC (digital still camera) with the printer. The table below describes  Primary power input
the specifications of each USB port.
Table 1-13. Primary Power Specifications
Table 1-11. USB Interface Specifications Stylus Photo R1900 Stylus Photo R2880
Item USB Device port USB Host port* Item
100-120V 220-240V 100-120V 220-240V
• Universal Serial Bus • Universal Serial Bus Rated power supply voltage 100 to 120 VAC 220 to 240 VAC 100 to 120 VAC 220 to 240 VAC
Specifications Revision 2.0 Specifications Revision 2.0
Compatible standards • Universal Serial Bus Device Input voltage range 90 to 132 VAC 198 to 264 VAC 90 to 132 VAC 198 to 264 VAC
Class Definition for Printing 0.6 A 0.3 A 0.5 A 0.3 A
Devices Version 1.1 Rated current
(max. 1.0 A) (max. 0.5 A) (max. 1.0 A) (max. 0.5 A)
Transfer rate 480 Mbps (High Speed) Rated frequency 50 to 60 Hz 50 to 60 Hz
Data format NRZI Input frequency range 49.5 to 60.5 Hz 49.5 to 60.5 Hz
Compatible connector USB Series B USB Series A Insulation resistance AC1000Vrms (for one minute) AC1000Vrms (for one minute)
Max. cable length 2 [m] or less 1.8 [m] or less Energy conservation International Energy Star Program compliant
Printing Approx. 20 W Approx. 20 W Approx. 20 W Approx. 21 W
Note * : External devices that can be connected to the USB device port are:
DSC compliant with the USB Direct Print Protocol specification Rev 1.0 Power Sleep mode Approx. 3.1 W Approx. 4.0 W Approx. 4.0 W Approx. 4.0 W
DSC compliant with the CIPA DC-001-2003 (PictBridge) specifications consumption
Standby mode
Approx. 0.2 W Approx. 0.5 W Approx. 0.2 W Approx. 0.4 W
Table 1-12. Device ID (power-off)

Prod- Note : If the printer is not operated for more than three minutes, the printer shifts into the
When IEEE 1284.4 is Enabled When IEEE 1284.4 is Disabled
uct standby mode and reduces the current to the motors to save power.
Stylus Photo R2880 Stylus Photo R1900

@EJL<SP>ID<CR><LF> @EJL<SP>ID<CR><LF>
MFG:EPSON; MFG:EPSON;
CMD:ESCPL2,BDC,D4,D4PX,ESCPR1; CMD:ESCPL2,BDC;
MDL:Stylus[SP]Photo[SP]R1900; MDL:Stylus[SP]Photo[SP]R1900;
CLS:PRINTER; CLS:PRINTER;
DES:EPSON[SP]Stylus[SP]Photo [SP]R1900; DES:EPSON[SP]Stylus[SP]Photo [SP]R1900;

@EJL<SP>ID<CR><LF> @EJL<SP>ID<CR><LF>
MFG:EPSON; MFG:EPSON;
CMD:ESCPL2,BDC,D4,D4PX,ESCPR1; CMD:ESCPL2,BDC;
MDL:Stylus[SP]Photo[SP]R2880; MDL:Stylus[SP]Photo[SP]R2880;
CLS:PRINTER; CLS:PRINTER;
DES:EPSON[SP]Stylus[SP]Photo [SP]R2880; DES:EPSON[SP]Stylus[SP]Photo [SP]R2880;

Product Description Interface 23

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

1.4.2 Environmental Conditions 1.4.3 Durability

Table 1-14. Environmental Conditions  Total print life: Black 16,000 pages (A4, 3.5% duty),
Color 10,000 pages (A4, 5% duty),
Condition Temperature*1 Humidity*1,2 Shock Vibration
or five years which ever comes first
10 to 35°C 1G 0.15G,
Operating 20 to 80%  Printhead: Six billions shots (per nozzle) or five years which ever comes
(50 to 95°F) (1 msec or less) 10 to 55Hz
first
Storage*3 -20 to 40°C*4 2G 0.50G,
5 to 85%
(unpacked) (-4°F to 104°F) (2 msec or less) 10 to 55Hz
1.4.4 Acoustic Noise
Note *1: The combined Temperature and Humidity conditions must be within the blue-shaded T.B.D. dB (when printing from PC, on Premium Glossy Photo Paper, in highest
range in Figure 1-3.
quality)
*2: No condensation
*3: Non-operating with unpacked.
1.4.5 Safety Approvals (Safety standards/EMI)
*4: Must be less than 1 month under 40°C.
USA UL60950-1
90
FCC Part15 Subpart B Class B
80 Canada CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.60950-1
CAN/CSA-CEI/IEC CISPR 22 Class B
70 Mexico NOM-019-SCFI-1998
60 Taiwan CNS13438 Class B
Humidity (%) CNS14336
50 EU EN60950-1
EN55022 Class B
40
EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3
30 EN55024
Germany EN60950-1
20
Russia GOST-R (IEC60950-1, CISPR 22)
Singapore IEC60950-1
27/80 Korea K60950-1
10/50 20/68 30/86 35/95 40/104 KN22 Class B
Temperature (°C/°F) KN61000-4-2/-3/-4/-5/-6/-11
China GB4943
Figure 1-3. Temperature/Humidity Range GB9254 Class B, GB17625.1
Argentina IEC60950-1
C A U T I

O
When returning the repaired printer to the customer, make sure
Australia AS/NZS CISPR22 Class B
the Printhead is covered with the cap and the ink cartridge is
installed. Hong Kong IEC60950-1
 If the Printhead is not covered with the cap when the printer is off,
turn on the printer with the ink cartridge installed, make sure the
Printhead is covered with the cap, and then turn the printer off.

Product Description General Specifications 24

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

1.5 Operation Buttons & Indicators (LEDs) Power LED Paper LED Ink LED

1.5.1 Operation Buttons

The printer has the following four operation buttons.

Table 1-15. Operation Buttons

Button Function
Power Turns the power ON/OFF.
Paper Feeds or ejects paper.
Ink Runs a sequence of ink cartridge replacement or cleaning. Power Button Ink Button Paper Button Roll Paper Button

Prints the cutting line on the roll paper or feeds the paper
Roll Paper Figure 1-4. Buttons & LEDs
backwards out of the printer.

1.5.2 Indicators (LEDs)

Eleven indicators (LEDs) are provided to indicate settings or printer status.

Table 1-16. Indicators (LEDs)

LED Function
Lights at power-on.
Power LED (green) Flashes during some sequence is in progress.
Flashes at high speed during power-OFF sequence.
Ink LED (orange)*1 Lights or flashes when an ink-related error occurs.*2
Paper LED (orange)*1 Lights or flashes when an paper- or CDR-related error occurs.*2
Cartridge LED (red) x 8 Indicates an ink-related error of each ink cartridge.*2
Note *1: The Ink LED and Paper LED stay OFF when printing from PC.
*2: See Table 1-18 "Indicators (LEDs) Function" for the LED status at error occurrence.

Product Description Operation Buttons & Indicators (LEDs) 25

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

1.5.3 Operation Buttons & LEDs Functions Table 1-17. Operation Button Functions
Printer
Detailed information on the buttons and LEDs functions are listed below. Button Function
Status
Table 1-17. Operation Button Functions • Ejects the paper backwards out of the printer.
Roll Paper
Printer (when held for three On • When an ink cartridge has been set in the ink
Button Function replacement position, moves the carriage to the home
Status seconds or longer)
position.
Off • Turns the power on.
Power Power + Ink *2 • Turns the power on in rub reduction mode when
On • Turns the power off. At power on
(combination) connected to DSC (digital still camera).
• Runs a sequence of ink cartridge replacement. The
Power + Ink *2 • Forcefully turns the power off.
carriage moves to set the ink cartridge to the position
(combination)
Ink On for replacement.
(Hold down the Ink On
• When an ink cartridge has been set in the ink replacement
button for 7 sec or
position, moves the carriage to the home position.
longer)
• Feeds or ejects paper.*1
Power + Paper *1 • Prints a nozzle check pattern*2 when not connected to
• Recovers from a multi-feed error and feeds paper to At power on
(combination) the PC.*3
restart the print job.
• Feeds paper when paper is loaded after a no-paper Note 1: The paper cannot be fed or ejected if the CDR Tray Base is open.
error occurs.
2: Stylus Photo R2880 only.
• Ejects a jammed paper when a paper jam error occurs.
On • Cancels the print job during printing. 3: The nozzle check pattern printed by the printer is shown inFigure 1-5 and Figure 1-6.
Paper • Runs a sequence of ink cartridge replacement when
an ink-out, or ink color error*2 occurs. The carriage
moves to set the ink cartridge to the position for
replacement.
• When an ink cartridge has been set in the ink replacement
position, moves the carriage to the home position.
During CDR • Recovers from a paper jam error.
printing • Cancels the print job during printing.
• Runs a head cleaning.
Ink
• Runs a sequence of ink cartridge replacement when
(when held for three On
seconds or longer) ink level low, ink out, no ink cartridge, or ink color
error*2 has occurred.
• Feeds the roll paper to the cutting position and prints
a cutting line.
• Returns the cutting position.
Roll Paper On
• When an ink cartridge has been set in the ink
replacement position, moves the carriage to the home
position.

Product Description Operation Buttons & Indicators (LEDs) 26

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Light Light Light Light Light

Yellow Magenta Matte Black Red Orange Cyan Photo Black Black Magenta Cyan Black Black Cyan Magenta Yellow

1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1
1 2 1 1 1 1 1

180 180 180 180

180 180 180 180

359 360 359 360

359 360 359

720 dpi VSD2

720 dpi VSD1 0.141 mm (1/180 inch)
0.141 mm (1/180 inch)
32 dots
32 dots

Note : The numbers shown in the figure are nozzle numbers. The numbers and color names Note : The numbers shown in the figure are nozzle numbers. The numbers and color names
are not printed on an actual nozzle check pattern. are not printed on an actual nozzle check pattern.

Figure 1-5. Nozzle Check Pattern (Stylus Photo R1900) Figure 1-6. Nozzle Check Pattern (Stylus Photo R2880)

Product Description Operation Buttons & Indicators (LEDs) 27

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 1-18. Indicators (LEDs) Function *2: The cartridge LED corresponding to each ink cartridge lights.
*3: The all LEDs light for 0.2 seconds when a reset request is received.
Indicators (LEDs) Pri-
Printer Status *4: Stylus Photo R2880 only.
Power Paper Ink ority*1
Flashes at Note : --: No change
Power OFF OFF OFF 1 Flash: Repeats turning On and Off every 1.25 seconds.
high speed
Flash 2: Repeats On for 0.5 seconds, Off for 0.5 seconds,
Flashes at Flashes at On for 0.5 seconds, and Off for 1.0 second.
Fatal error OFF 2
high speed high speed Flash 3: Repeats Off for 0.5 seconds, On for 0.5 seconds,
Flashes Flashes Off for 0.5 seconds, and On for 1.0 second.
Maintenance request OFF 3
alternately 1 alternately 2 Flash 4: Repeats On for 2.0 seconds and Off for 0.5 seconds.
Flash at high speed: Repeats turning On and Off every 0.5 seconds.
Flashes at
CDR guide error -- Flashes 2 4 Flashes alternately 1: Same as the “Flash”
high speed
Flashes alternately 2: Repeats turning Off and On every 1.25 seconds.
Paper path error -- Flashes --
Paper (CDR) jam -- Flashes -- 5
Cover open error -- Flashes --
Multi-feed error -- ON --
6
No paper error -- ON --
Ink cartridge replacement is in progress Flashes -- -- 7
Ink sequence is in progress Flashes -- -- 8
CSIC error -- -- ON*2
9
No ink cartridge error or ink-out error -- -- ON*2
Flashes at
Ink Color error*4 -- -- 10
high speed*2
Data processing/Printing from camera Flashes -- --
Connected to non-supported external
-- Flashes 2 Flashes 3 11
device
Connected to USB hub -- Flashes 4 Flashes
Ink level low -- -- Flashes*2 12
Connected to camera
Flashes 4 -- --
(with rubbing reduction)
Connected to camera 13
Flashes 2 -- --
(without rubbing reduction)
Power ON Flashes -- --
Reset request*3 ON ON ON --

Note *1: When two or more errors occur at the same time, the one with higher priority will be indicated.

Product Description Operation Buttons & Indicators (LEDs) 28

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

1.5.4 Errors & Remedies Note : For more information on the remedies, see "3.1.1 Troubleshooting according to
Error Messages" (p.36).
Table 1-19. Errors & Remedies Note *1: When the CDR Tray Base is opened, close the CDR Tray Base and press the Paper
button.
Error Error Remedies
*2: When the CDR tray has been inserted, remove the CDR tray and press the Ink button.
Fatal error A mechanical error has occurred. Turn the power Off and back it On.
*3: Stylus Photo R2880 only.
Maintenance Waste ink pads need to be Replace the waste ink pads and reset
request replaced. the counter.
• The CDR Tray Base was open Close the CDR Tray Base.
when receiving or printing a
ASF print job.
CDR guide error
• The CDR Tray Base was Open the CDR Tray Base.
closed when receiving or
printing a CDR print job.
A paper jam has occurred. <When printing on paper>
Remove the jammed paper and press
the Paper button.*1
Paper jam
<When printing on CDR>
Remove the jammed CDR tray and
press the Paper button.
Failed to feed paper. Load paper correctly and press the
No paper
Paper button.*1
Multiple sheets of paper were fed Press the Paper button to eject the
Multi-feed
at the same time. multiple sheets.*1
Ink-out The cartridge has run out of ink. Replace the cartridge with a new one.*2
No ink cartridge Ink cartridge(s) was not detected. Replace the cartridge with a new one.*2
Wrong ink Incorrect ink cartridge(s) was Replace the cartridge with the correct
cartridge detected. one.*2
The paper was loaded in a Eject the fed paper and press the Paper
Paper path error different way from the specified button after loading paper in the
one. specified way.
Printing was executed with the Close the Printer Cover.
Cover open error
Printer Cover open.
The black ink cartridge was Replace the cartridge with the one
replaced during printing. used before the error.
Ink Color error*3 Cleaning after black ink Replace the black ink cartridge with
replacement cannot be the one used before the error, or the
performed. one that has sufficient amount of ink.

Product Description Operation Buttons & Indicators (LEDs) 29

 CHAPTER

2
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

2.1 Overview The basic mechanism is almost same as the Stylus Photo R1800.
The schematic diagram below shows the printer mechanism.
This chapter explains the operating principles of the mechanical sections and electrical
circuits in this product. The main components of this product are as follows. PF Encoder PF Scale PF Motor
Sensor
 Control circuit board : C698 MAIN
 Power supply circuit board : C698 PSB/PSE
Front Paper APG Sensors
 Control panel board : C698 PNL Eject Roller

 LED board : C698 PNL-B Rear Paper

Eject Roller APG Motor

PF Roller
APF Sensor
2.2 Printer Mechanism
CR Scale
Like the conventional model, this product uses DC motors and stepping motors as
power sources. The following table describes the motor types and their applications.
Cover Open Timing Belt
Table 2-1. Motors Sensor CR Encoder
Sensor
Motor Name Type Applications/Functions
PW Sensor LD Roller
Used for carriage driving. Makes little noise during
DC motor with
CR Motor driving. The CR linear scale and CR encoder sensor
brushes
are used to control the motor. Ink Mark
Drives the Paper loading rollers at the time of fixed- Sensor
value paper loading or paper feed/eject operation. To Retard
DC motor with Carriage Roller
PF Motor grasp the paper feed pitch, the precision gear surface
brushes Unit
is fitted with the PF scale and the PF encoder sensor
is used to control the motor.
Drives the Carriage Unit at the time of PG setting. Ink System
DC motor with Unit PE Sensor
APG Motor The two APG Sensors are driven vertically to control
brushes
the motor.
4-phase, 48-pole Drives the paper feed operation of the ASF. Since Pump Motor
ASF Motor
ASF Motor PM type stepping this is a stepping motor, any scales or photo sensors
motor to know the driving conditions are not required. CD-R Sensor

4-phase, 48-pole Drives the pump, wiper, etc. of the Ink System. Since Carriage CR Motor
Pump Motor PM type stepping this is a stepping motor, any scales or photo sensors Shaft
motor to know the driving conditions are not required. Figure 2-1. Printer Mechanism Outline

Operating Principles Overview 31

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

2.3 Printhead Specifications

The Printhead of this product is a F-Mach head.
The following shows the arrangement of the nozzles and the color arrangement of each nozzle line when viewed the Print Head from behind.
 Stylus Photo R1900  Stylus Photo R2880

7.620mm 7.620mm 7.620mm 7.620mm 7.620mm 7.620mm

(216/720inch) (216/720inch) (216/720inch) (216/720inch) (216/720inch) (216/720inch)
2.258mm 2.258mm 2.258mm 2.258mm 2.258mm 2.258mm 2.258mm 2.258mm
(64/720inch) (64/720inch) (64/720inch) (64/720inch) (64/720inch) (64/720inch) (64/720inch) (64/720inch)

Paper feeding Paper feeding

direction direction
Line A Line C Line E Line G Line A Line C Line E Line G
Line B Line D Line F Line H Line B Line D Line F Line H

0.071mm 0.141mm 0.071mm 0.141mm

(1/360inch) (1/180inch) (1/360inch) (1/180inch)

31.89mm 31.89mm
41.66mm 41.66mm

Carriage moving direction Carriage moving direction

Figure 2-2. Nozzle Arrangement (Stylus Photo R1900) Figure 2-3. Nozzle Arrangement (Stylus Photo R2880)

Table 2-2. Nozzle Lines and the Corresponding Ink Color (Stylus Photo R1900) Table 2-3. Nozzle Lines and the Corresponding Ink Color (Stylus Photo R2880)
Line Ink Line Ink
A Yellow A Light Light Black
B Magenta B Vivid Light Magenta
C Matte Black C Light Cyan
D Red D Light Black
E Orange E Matte Black/Photo Black
F Photo Black F Cyan
G Gloss Optimizer G Vivid Magenta
H Cyan H Yellow

Operating Principles Printhead Specifications 32

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

2.4 PG Setting
As this printer uses an Auto PG (APG), an appropriate PG position is set according to the used paper type.
The following table indicates the PG positions, the main applications of each position, and the relationships between the two sensors used with the APG.

Table 2-4.
PG Position
Application
PG (– –) PG (–) PG (Typ) PG (+) PG (++) Release
Printing • Photo paper • Roll paper • Plain paper • Envelope • CD/DVD
(A4,Letter) • Photo Matte paper • Exclusive paper • PG (Typ) rub avoidance –
• PG (-) rub avoidance
Non-printing • Standby position after • Ink Mark Sensor reading. • Initialization at power-on • Standby state for CD/
power-on (When the (Detection of dot • Cleaning (wiping) DVD feeding
CDR Tray Base is missing) • Ink Cartridge • Paper jam removal
– – closed.) replacement
• At power-off
• Ink Mark Sensor reading.
(Auto Bi-D)
PG value 1.05mm 1.20mm 1.70mm 2.10mm 4.50mm –
Sensor PG (– –) PG (–) PG (Typ) PG (+) PG (++) Release
APG Sensor 1* Low Low Low Low Low Low
APG Sensor 2 Low Low Low Low High High

Note "*": The signal output is “High” while the PG positions are changed.

Operating Principles PG Setting 33

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

2.5 Motors & Sensors Table 2-6. List of Sensors

Fig. Name Specific
 Motors 8 Ink Mark Sensor Type: Diffuse reflective photo interrupter Drive voltage: 3.3(5)VDC±5%
Table 2-5. List of Motors Type: Mechanical contact Drive voltage: 3.3VDC±5%
Sensor output:
Fig. Name Specific 9 CDR Sensor
• High: CDR Tray Base open
Type: DC Motor Drive voltage: 42VDC±5% • Low: CDR Tray Base closed
A PF Motor
Armature resistance: 21.2Ω ±10%
Type: Mechanical contact Drive voltage: 3.3VDC±5%
Type: DC Motor Drive voltage: 42VDC±5% Cover Open Sensor output:
B APG Motor 10
Armature resistance: 64.7Ω ±15% Sensor • High: Cover closed
Type: 4-phase 48-pole PM type stepping motor Drive voltage: 42VDC±5% • Low: Cover open
C ASF Motor
Winding resistance: 7.0Ω ±10% (per phase at 25°C)
Type: DC Motor Drive voltage: 42VDC±5%
D CR Motor
Armature resistance: 23.6Ω ±10% B 4
Type: 4-phase 48-pole PM type stepping motor Drive voltage: 42VDC±5% 3
E Pump Motor
Winding resistance: 10.3Ω ±10% (per phase at 25°C)

 Sensors
2
Table 2-6. List of Sensors
5
Fig. Name Specific A 6
1 PF Encoder sensor Type: Rotary Encoder Drive voltage: 3.3VDC±5%
Type: Transmissive photo interrupter Drive voltage: 3.3VDC±5%
Sensor output:
2 APG Sensor (1)
• High: In the domain of each PG position 1 C
• Low: Between PG positions
Type: Transmissive photo interrupter Drive voltage: 3.3VDC±5%
Sensor output:
3 APG Sensor (2)
• High: In the domain of large PG
• Low: In the domain of small PG
Type: Transmissive photo interrupter Drive voltage: 3.3VDC±5% D
4 ASF Sensor
Sensor output: 10
• High: Home position
• Low: Other than home position
Type: Transmissive photo interrupter Drive voltage: 3.3VDC±5%
Sensor output: E
5 PE Sensor
• High (2.4V or more): No paper
• Low (0.4V or less): Paper exists
6 CR Encoder sensor Type: Linear Encoder Drive voltage: 3.3VDC±5%
7
Type: Reflective photo interrupter Drive voltage: 3.3VDC±5%
9 8
Sensor output:
7 PW Sensor
• High: No paper Figure 2-4. Motors and Sensors Layout
• Low: Paper exists

Operating Principles Motors & Sensors 34

 CHAPTER

3
TROUBLESHOOTING
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

3.1 Overview
This chapter describes unit-level troubleshooting.

3.1.1 Troubleshooting according to Error Messages

After checking the printer LED and STM3 error indications, you can grasp the fault location using the check list in this section. When you find the fault location, refer to Chapter 4
“Disassembly and Reassembly” and change the corresponding part and/or unit. The following table indicates the check point reference tables corresponding to the error states (LED
and STM3).
Table 3-1. List of Error Messages
LED Indications
Error Status STM3 Message See the table for Troubleshooting
Power Paper Ink
Communication error
Communication error - - - Check all connections and make sure all devices are on. If the power was
turned off during printing, cancel the print job. If the error does not clear,
see your printer documentation. Refer to Table 3-2 "Troubleshooting of Communication
Error" (P.39)
Different device from specified
Model Difference - - - Attempting to connect to a different device from that specified in the driver.
Check the driver settings and the device.
Printer cover open Printer cover open Refer to Table 3-3 "Troubleshooting of Printer Cover
- Flash - Open Error" (P.41)
error Close the printer cover.
Flashes at Front paper feed guide open Refer to Table 3-4 "Troubleshooting of CDR Guide
CDR Guide error - Flash 2
high speed Remove the CD/DVD tray, then close the front paper feed guide. Error" (P.42)
Media out or not loaded correctly
For sheets of paper, reload the paper correctly, then press the Paper button
on the printer. Refer to Table 3-5 "Troubleshooting of Paper Out
Paper out error - Light -
For roll paper or velvet paper, insert the end of the paper into the printer. Error" (P.43)
For a CD or DVD, load the CD/DVD tray correctly, then press the Paper
button on the printer.
Paper jam or CD/DVD tray jam
For sheets of paper, turn off the printer and then remove any jammed paper Refer to Table 3-6 "Troubleshooting of Paper Jam
Paper (CDR) jam - Flash - by hand. Error" (P.47)
For a CD or DVD, remove the CD/DVD tray. Next, press the Paper button
on the printer or click the Eject button if it appears on this screen.

Troubleshooting Overview 36
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-1. List of Error Messages

LED Indications
Error Status STM3 Message See the table for Troubleshooting
Power Paper Ink
Paper Source setting not selected correctly
For sheets of paper, remove the roll paper or velvet paper and print again.
For roll paper, select Roll Paper as the Paper Source setting in the printer Refer to Table 3-7 "Troubleshooting of Paper Mismatch
Paper Mismatch Error - Flash -
driver and print again. Error" (P.48)
For velvet paper, select Velvet Fine Art Paper as the Paper Source setting in
the printer driver and print again.
Page not printed or multi-page error
Multi-feed error - Light - A page has not been printed, multiple pages have been fed into the printer at Refer to Table 3-8 "Troubleshooting of Multi-feed
once, or the wrong paper size has been fed into the printer. Remove and error" (P.50)
reload the paper. Press the Paper button if necessary.
Ink low
Black: XXXX*2
Color: XXXX
Ink low - - Light*2 Refer to Table 3-9 "Troubleshooting of Ink Low" (P.50)
..................
You may continue printing, or click the How to button to
change the ink cartridge now.
Ink cartridges cannot be replaced
There are two possible causes.
Because there is only a small amount of ink remaining,
you cannot replace it with a different type of black ink cartridge.
(However, you may be able to replace it with the same type of black ink
cartridge.)
Flashes at Replace it with a new ink cartridge. We recommend using genuine Epson Refer to Table 3-10 "Troubleshooting of Ink Color Error
Ink Color error*1 - -
high speed*2 ink cartridges. (Stylus Photo R2880 only)" (P.50)
Or, the currently installed black ink differs to the type of cartridge used
when printing started.
Replace the currently installed black ink cartridge with the same type of
previously installed black ink cartridge.
Once it is replaced, printing will resume automatically. If you do not want to
replace the ink cartridge, click the Cancel button.

Troubleshooting Overview 37
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-1. List of Error Messages

LED Indications
Error Status STM3 Message See the table for Troubleshooting
Power Paper Ink
Replace Cartridge
Black: XXXX*2
Color: XXXX
Ink-out error - - Light*2
..................
Epson recommends the genuine Epson cartridges listed above. Click the
How to button for ink cartridge replacement instructions. Refer to Table 3-12 "Troubleshooting of No Ink
Ink cartridges cannot be recognized Cartridge/CSIC Error" (P.51)
Black: XXXX*2
No ink cartridge/ Color: XXXX
- - Light*2
CSIC error ..................
Epson recommends the genuine Epson cartridges listed above. Click the
How to button for ink cartridge installation instructions.
Service required
Flashes Flashes Refer to Table 3-13 "Troubleshooting of Maintenance
Maintenance request Off
alternately 1 alternately 2 Parts inside your printer are at the end of their service life. See your printer Request" (P.52)
documentation.
General error
Flashes at Flashes at Refer to Table 3-14 "Troubleshooting of Fatal Error"
Fatal error Off Delete all print jobs and turn the printer off. Remove any foreign objects
high speed high speed (P.53)
from inside the printer. After a few minutes, turn the printer back on.
Note *1: Stylus Photo R2880 only.
*2: The cartridge LED corresponding to each ink cartridge lights.
*3: The “XXXX” represents the part number of the Ink Cartridge.
Refer to "1.2.2 Ink Cartridge" (p13).
Note : --: No change
Flash: Repeats turning On and Off every 1.25 seconds.
Flash 2: Repeats On for 0.5 seconds, Off for 0.5 seconds,
On for 0.5 seconds, and Off for 1.0 second.
Flash at high speed: Repeats turning On and Off every 0.5 seconds.
Flashes alternately 1: Same as the “Flash”
Flashes alternately 2: Repeats turning Off and On every 1.25 seconds.

Troubleshooting Overview 38
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting of Communication Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
At power-on The printer does not operate at all. Panel FFC 1. Check that the Panel FFC is connected to the Panel Board 1. Connect the Panel FFC to the Panel Board and
connector and Main Board connector. Main Board connectors.

Panel Board Panel FFC

connector

CN4
Panel FFC

2. Check the Panel FFC for damages. 2. Replace the Panel FFC with a new one.
Panel Board 1. Check the Panel Board for damages. 1. Replace the Panel Board with a new one.
Power Supply 1. Check that the connector cable of the Power Supply Board is 1. Connect the connector cable of the Power
Board connected to the Main Board connector CN60. Supply Board to the Main Board connector
CN60.

Connector cable of the

Power Supply Board
Blue line

CN60
1Pin side

2. Check that the blue colored pin of the Power Supply Board 2. Reconnect the Power Supply Board connector
connector cable is inserted into the 1 Pin of the Main Board cable so that the blue colored pin is inserted
connector CN60 as shown in the above picture. into the 1 Pin.

Troubleshooting Overview 39
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting of Communication Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
At power-on The printer does not operate at all. Power Supply 3. Check that the Fuse F1 on the Power Supply Board has not 3. Replace the Power Supply Board with a new
Board blown. one.

Power Supply
Board

Fuse F1

4. Check the components on the Power Supply Board for damage. 4. Replace the Power Supply Board with a new
one.
After the power-on sequence has Main Board 1. Check that the Relay connector of the ASF Motor and the Relay 1. Connect the Relay connector of the ASF Motor
started, the LED turns off and the connector of the Pump Motor are not connected to the wrong and the Relay connector of the Pump Motor
printer does not operate. connector causing a short circuit. correctly, and replace the Main Board with a
new one.
Relay connector of
the ASF Motor

Relay connector of
the Pump Motor

At operation Operation at power-on is normal, Interface cable 1. Check that the Interface cable is connected between the PC and 1. Connect the Interface cable to the PC and
but the error appears when the printer. printer.
print job is sent to the printer.
2. Check the Interface cable for breaking. 2. Replace the Interface cable with a new one.

Troubleshooting Overview 40
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting of Communication Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
At operation Operation at power-on is normal, USB 1. Check that the PC and printer are connected via the USB hub. 1. Configure the USB ID setting.
but the error appears when the Refer to Chapter 5 "Adjustment".
print job is sent to the printer.
Printer Driver 1. Check that the printer driver for Stylus Photo R1900 has already 1. Install the printer driver for Stylus Photo
been installed. R1900.
2. Check that the connected printer is Stylus Photo R1900. 2. Connect the Stylus Photo R1900 printer.
Main Board 1. Check that a wrong model name has not been input to the 1. Make the initial setting using the Adjustment
EEPROM on the Main Board. Program.
Refer to Chapter 5"Adjustment".

Table 3-3. Troubleshooting of Printer Cover Open Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
During printing A Printer Cover Open Error is Cover Open 1. Check that the Printer Cover is not open. 1. Close the Printer Cover.
indicated during printing. Sensor
2. Check that the connector cable of the Cover Open Sensor is 2. Connect the connector cable of the Cover Open
connected to the Cover Open Sensor and connector CN4 on the Sensor to the Cover Open Sensor and
Panel Board. connector CN4 on the Panel Board correctly.

CN4 Connector of the Cover

Open Sensor

Panel Unit

3. Using a tester, check that the Cover Open Sensor is normal. 4. Replace the Panel Unit with a new one.
• Paper absent:0V
• Paper present:3.3V

Troubleshooting Overview 41
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-4. Troubleshooting of CDR Guide Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
At operation CDR Guide Error is indicated on CDR Sensor 1. Check that the CDR Sensor is installed correctly. 1. Install the CDR Sensor correctly.
the LED and STM3 when CD/
DVD printing is executed after
the CDR Tray Base is opened and
the CDR Tray is inserted.

OK NG

2. Check that the connector cable of the CDR Sensor is connected 2. Connect the connector cable of the CDR
to the CDR Sensor and the connector on the Panel Board. Sensor to the CDR Sensor and the Panel Board.

CDR Sensor Connector on the

Panel Board

Connector cable of
the CDR Sensor

3. Using a tester, check that the CDR Sensor is normal. 3. Replace the CDR Sensor with a new one.
• CDR Tray Base open: 3.3V
• CDR Tray Base closed: 0V
4. Check the CDR Sensor or connector cable for damages. 4. Replace the CDR Sensor with a new one.

Troubleshooting Overview 42
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-5. Troubleshooting of Paper Out Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
At operation When the Paper Switch is ASF Assy. 1. Check the LD Roller or Retard Roller of the ASF Assy for paper 1. Using a cleaning sheet, clean the LD Roller
pressed, the LD Roller attempt to dust and foreign matter. and Retard Roller. The procedure is as follows.
feed paper but the paper is not (1) Place the cleaning sheet upside down and
fed. put it into the ASF Assy.
(2) Press the Paper Switch to start paper feed.
(3) Repeat the above steps several times.
* To remove persistent contamination, staple
an alcohol-dampened cloth to a postcard
and clean the rollers in the following
method.
Cleaning sheet Postcard used
as mount

Non-adhesive part

Adhesive part

Stapling
This side down
Cloth damped
with alcohol

(1) Place the alcohol-dampened cloth toward

the LD Roller surface of the ASF Assy.
(2) Hold the mount top end securely and press
the Paper Switch.
(3) Repeat the paper feed sequence several
times to clean the LD Roller surface of the
ASF Assy.

Troubleshooting Overview 43
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-5. Troubleshooting of Paper Out Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
At operation Paper Mismatch Error is indicated PE Sensor 1. Check that the connector cable of the PE Sensor is securely 1. Connect the connector cable of the PE Sensor
even the paper path of the media connected to the PE Sensor and Relay Board connector CN2. to the PE Sensor and connector CN2 on the
to be printed is correct. Relay Board correctly.
PW Sensor connector CN2

2. Check that the Sensor Holder is mounted to the Mechanical 2. Install the Sensor Holder correctly.
frame correctly.

Sensor Holder

Detection Lever

Torsion Spring

3. Move the Detection Lever manually as when the paper passes, 3. Replace the PE Sensor Holder Unit with a new
and check that the Detection Lever returns to the original one.
position automatically by the Torsion Spring when released.
Refer to the above photo.
4. Using a tester, check that the PE Sensor is normal. 4. Replace the PE Sensor Holder Unit with a new
⋅ Paper absent : 2.4V or more one.
⋅ Paper present : 0.4V or less

Troubleshooting Overview 44
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-5. Troubleshooting of Paper Out Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
The Paper Switch The CDR Tray HP detection CDR Tray 1. Check the HP detection position or white markings of the CDR 1. Remove paper dust and/or foreign matter from
was pressed at the sequence stops and the Tray is Tray for paper dust and foreign matter. the detection position.
setting of the CDR ejected.
Tray.

White Markings
HP detection
position

2. Check the Driven Roller surface for contamination such as paper 2. Feed A4-size sheets of plain paper from the
dust and CDR coating material. ASF Assy several times to remove the
contamination.
3. Check that the HP detection position or white markings of the 3. Replace the CDR Tray with a new one.
CDR Tray are not chipped.
The Paper Switch Though the CDR Tray is fed PW sensor 1. Check the PW Sensor for paper dust, ink, etc. 1. Clean the PW Sensor surface.
was pressed at the toward the ASF Assy, but is
PW sensor
setting of the CDR ejected immediately.
Tray.

Carriage Unit Bottom

2. Compare the EEPROM values in two places (50<H> and 2. Replace the PW Sensor with a new one.
51<H>) and check that they are not approximate to each other.

Troubleshooting Overview 45
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-5. Troubleshooting of Paper Out Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
The Paper Switch The CDR Tray moves toward the PW sensor 1. Check that the PW Sensor FFC is placed in the specified routing 1. Place the PW Sensor FFC in the specified
was pressed at the ASF and the posterior edge of it positions and does not make contact with any parts. routing positions correctly.
setting of the CDR reaches to the Driven Roller on
Tray. the Upper Paper Guide.Then the CR Encoder Board PW Sensor
connector connector
CDR Tray tries to go farther, but
it is ejected.

FFC

2. Check that the PW Sensor FFC is connected to the CR Encoder 2. Connect the FFC to the CR Encoder Board and
Board and PW Sensor connectors. Refer to the above photo. PW Sensor connectors correctly.
3. Check the PW Sensor or PW Sensor FFC for damages. 3. Replace the PW Sensor (or the PW Sensor
FFC) with a new one.

Troubleshooting Overview 46
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting of Paper Jam Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
At operation At the time of paper ejection, the – 1. Check that the size of the fed paper is not larger than that of the 1. Tell the user that the paper size specified by the
PF Roller advances the paper but paper specified by the driver. driver is not available for the printer.
cannot eject it completely.
Paper is not ejected completely ASF Assy. 1. Check that the paper is fed along the Right Edge Guide. 1. Feed the paper along the Right Edge Guide.
and causes a jam near the Paper
Paper EJ Frame 1. Check that the Star Wheel Units have not come off the Paper EJ 1. Securely install the Star Wheel Units to the
Eject Frame.
Assy. Frame Assy. Paper EJ Frame Assy.

Paper EJ Frame Assy.

Star Wheel Units

2. Check the Paper EJ Frame Assy for deformation or damages. 2. Replace the Paper EJ Frame Assy with a new
one.
Spur Gear 68 1. Check the Spur Gear 68 or Spur Gear 16; B for damages. 1. Replace the Front (or Rear) Paper EJ Roller
Spur Gear 16; B Assy with a new one.
Paper EJ Roller Spur Gear 16; B
Assy.(front/rear)

Spur Gear 68

Troubleshooting Overview 47
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-7. Troubleshooting of Paper Mismatch Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/Part
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Name
During printing Paper Mismatch Error is PE Sensor 1. Check that the connector cable of the PE Sensor is securely 1. Connect the connector cable of the PE Sensor
indicated even the paper path of connected to the PE Sensor and Relay Board connector CN2. to the PE Sensor and connector CN2 on the
the media to be printed is Relay Board correctly.
correct. PW Sensor connector CN2

2. Check that the Sensor Holder is mounted to the Mechanical 2. Install the Sensor Holder correctly.
frame correctly.

Sensor Holder

Detection Lever

Torsion Spring

3. Move the Detection Lever manually as when the paper passes, 3. Replace the PE Sensor Holder Unit with a new
and check that the Detection Lever returns to the original one.
position automatically by the Torsion Spring when released.
Refer to the above photo.
4. Using a tester, check that the PE Sensor is normal. 4. Replace the PE Sensor Holder Unit with a new
⋅ Paper absent : 2.4V or more one.
⋅ Paper present : 0.4V or less

Troubleshooting Overview 48
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-7. Troubleshooting of Paper Mismatch Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/Part
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Name
During printing Paper Mismatch Error is CDR Sensor 1. Check that the CDR Sensor is installed correctly. 1. Install the CDR Sensor correctly.
indicated even the paper path of
the media to be printed is
correct.

OK NG

2. Check that the connector cable of the CDR Sensor is connected 2. Connect the connector cable of the CDR
to the CDR Sensor and the connector on the Panel Board. Sensor to the CDR Sensor and the Panel
Board.
CDR Sensor Connector on the
Panel Board

Connector cable of
the CDR Sensor

3. Using a tester, check that the CDR Sensor is normal. 3. Replace the CDR Sensor with a new one.
• CDR Tray Base open: 3.3V
• CDR Tray Base closed: 0V
4. Check the CDR Sensor or connector cable for damages. 4. Replace the CDR Sensor with a new one.

Troubleshooting Overview 49
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-8. Troubleshooting of Multi-feed error

Occurrence Faulty Part/Part
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Name
Any time During manual double-sided ASF Assy 1. Check that the Retard Roller Assy is moving properly during the 1. Attach the Extension Spring on the back side
printing, multiple sheets are fed feeding operation. of the Retard Roller Assy correctly.
at a time.
Bottom of
the ASF Assy
Extension Spring
Retard Roller
Assy

ASF Assy

2. Check that the position of the ASF Guide Roller LDs has been 2. Adjust the position of the ASF Guide Roller
adjusted correctly. LDs.
Refer to Chapter 4 ASF Assy (P.108).

Table 3-9. Troubleshooting of Ink Low

Occurrence Faulty Part/Part
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Name
At operation or A message is displayed on the Ink Cartridge 1. Look at the remaining ink indication of the STM3 to check the 1. Prepare a new Ink Cartridge.
during printing LED and STM3 during printing. amount of the ink remaining in the Ink Cartridge.

Table 3-10. Troubleshooting of Ink Color Error (Stylus Photo R2880 only)
Occurrence Faulty Part/Part
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Name
During printing A message is displayed on the Ink Cartridge 1. Check if the installed black ink cartridge is different in color 1. Install the same type of black ink cartridge as
LED and STM3 after replacing (photo or matte) from the previous one. the one previously used.
ink cartridge.
2. Check if the installed cartridge is nearly empty by checking the 2. Prepare a new Ink Cartridge.
ink level displayed on the STM3.

Troubleshooting Overview 50
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-11. Troubleshooting of Ink Out Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/Part
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Name
During printing After the Carriage has detected Ink Cartridge 1. Look at the remaining ink indication of the STM3 to check 1. Replace the Ink Cartridge with a new one.
the HP, an error is displayed on whether the ink remains in the Ink Cartridge.
the LED and STM3.

Table 3-12. Troubleshooting of No Ink Cartridge/CSIC Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
At power-on After the Carriage has detected Ink Cartridge 1. Check that the Ink Cartridge is installed correctly. 1. Install the Ink Cartridge correctly.
the HP, an error is displayed on
2. Check that the tab of the Ink Cartridge is not broken. 2. Replace the Ink Cartridge with a new one.
the LED and STM3.

Tab

3. Check that the Memory Chip is not disconnected or not 3. Replace the Ink Cartridge with a new one.
damaged.

Memory Chip

Troubleshooting Overview 51
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-12. Troubleshooting of No Ink Cartridge/CSIC Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
At power-on After the Carriage has detected CSIC FFC 1. Check that the CSIC FFC is connected to the CSIC Board 1. Connect the CSIC FFC to the CSIC Board
the HP, an error is displayed on connector and Main Board connector CN22. connector and Main Board connector CN22.
the LED and STM3.

CSIC FFC

CSIC Board
connector CN22

2. Check the CSIC FFC for damage. 2. Replace the CSIC FFC with a new one.
CSIC Board 1. Check the CSIC Board for damage. 1. Replace the CSIC Board with a new one.

CSIC Board

Table 3-13. Troubleshooting of Maintenance Request

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
At power-on At power-on, the printer does not Waste Ink Pads 1. Using the Adjustment Program, check if the values of the 1. Replace the Waste Ink Pads and reset the
operate at all. Protection Counter A and B have exceeded the values shown Protection Counter A and B value with the
below. Adjustment Program.
• Protection Counter A : 21,500 (Stylus Photo R1900)
: 22,500 (Stylus Photo R2880)
• Protection Counter B : 7,030

Troubleshooting Overview 52
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-14. Troubleshooting of Fatal Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
At power-on At power-on, the CR Motor does CR Motor 1. Check that the CR Motor connector cable is connected to the 1. Connect the CR Motor connector to the Relay
not operate at all. Relay connector. connector.

CR Motor

Relay connector

2. Check the CR Motor connector cable for damages. 2. Replace the CR Motor with a new one.
3. Check if the CR Motor operates normally. 3. Replace the CR Motor with a new one.
Relay connector 1. Check that the Relay connector cable is connected to the Main 1. Connect the Relay connector cable to the Main
cables Board connector CN15. Board connector CN15.
(for the CR
Motor)

CN15

2. Check the Relay connector cable for damages. 2. Replace the Relay connector cable with a new
one.

Troubleshooting Overview 53
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-14. Troubleshooting of Fatal Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
At power-on The power-on sequence is CR drive 1. Check that the Carriage Shaft is lubricated with grease. 1. Wipe the surface of the Carriage Shaft with a
executed but Fatal error is mechanism dry, soft cloth, and lubricate the Carriage Shaft
displayed. with grease G-71.
Carriage Shaft
Refer to Chapter 6 "Maintenance".

At power-on, the PF Motor does PF Motor 1. Check that the connector cable of the PF Motor is connected to 1. Connect the PF Motor connector cable to the
not operate at all. the Main Board connector CN116. Main Board connector CN116.

CN116

2. Check the PF Motor connector cable for damages. 2. Replace the PF Motor with a new one.
3. Check if the PF Motor operates normally. 3. Replace the PF Motor with a new one.

Troubleshooting Overview 54
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-14. Troubleshooting of Fatal Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
At power-on At power-on, the APG Motor APG Motor 1. Check that the connector cable of the APG Motor is connected to 1. Connect the APG Motor connector cable to the
does not operate at all. the Main Board connector CN118. Main Board connector CN118.

CN118

2. Check the APG Motor connector cable for damage. 2. Replace the APG Motor with a new one.
3. Check if the APG Motor operates normally. 3. Replace the APG Motor with a new one.
At power-on, the Pump Motor Pump Motor 1. Check that the Pump Motor connector cable is connected to the 1. Connect the Pump Motor connector cable to
does not operate at all. Relay connector. the Relay connector.

Relay connector

2. Using a tester, check the resistance value of the Pump Motor. 2. If the resistance value is abnormal, replace the
Value of resistance: 10.3Ω ± 10% Ink System Unit with a new one.
3. Check the Pump Motor connector cable for damages. 3. Replace the Ink System Unit with a new one.

Troubleshooting Overview 55
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-14. Troubleshooting of Fatal Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
At power-on At power-on, the Pump Motor Relay connector 1. Check that the Relay connector cable is connected to the Main 1. Connect the Relay connector cable to the Main
does not operate at all. cables (for Pump Board connector CN117. Board connector CN117.
Motor)

CN117

2. Check the Relay connector cable for damages. 2. Replace the Relay connector cable with a new
one.
While the power-on sequence is APG Sensor 1. Check that the APG Sensor connector cables are connected to 1. Connect the APG Sensor connector cables to
being executed, Fatal error is the APG Sensors and Relay Board connector CN4 and CN5. the APG Sensors and Relay Board connector
displayed. CN4 and CN5.

APG Sensors

CN4

CN5

2. Check the APG Sensors for damages. 2. Replace the APG Sensors with new ones.

Troubleshooting Overview 56
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-14. Troubleshooting of Fatal Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
At power-on While the power-on sequence is ASF Motor 1. Check that the connector cable of the ASF Motor is connected to 1. Connect the connector cable of the ASF Motor
being executed, Fatal error is the Relay connector. to the Relay connector.
displayed.
ASF Motor

Relay connector

2. Using a tester, check the resistance value of the ASF Motor. 2. If the resistance value is abnormal, replace the
Value of resistance: 7.0Ω ± 10% ASF Motor with a new one.
3. Check the ASF Motor connector cable for damages. 3. Replace the ASF Motor with a new one.
Relay connector 1. Check that the Relay connector cable is connected to the Main 1. Connect the Relay connector cable to the Main
cable Board connector CN119. Board connector CN119.
(for the ASF
Motor)

CN119

2. Check the Relay connector cable for damages. 2. Replace the Relay connector cable with a new
one.

Troubleshooting Overview 57
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-14. Troubleshooting of Fatal Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
At power-on While the power-on sequence is Relay FFC 1. Check that the Relay FFC is connected to the Relay Board 1. Connect the Relay FFC to the Relay Board
being executed, Fatal error is connector CN1 and Main Board connector CN15. connector CN1 and Main Board connector
displayed. CN15.
CN1 Relay FFC

CN15

2. Check the Relay FFC for damages. 2. Replace the Relay FFC cable with a new one.
At power-on, the Carriage Unit CR Scale 1. Check that the CR Scale is inserted in the slit of the CR Encoder 1. Insert the CR Scale into the slit of the CR
moves away from the home Sensor. Encoder Sensor.
position and bumps against the
right of the Frame, then hits the CR Scale
left of the Frame.

CR Encoder
Sensor Board

2. Check the CR Scale for damages and dirt. 2. Wipe off the dirt completely or replace the CR
Scale with a new one.
CR Encoder 1. Check the CR Encoder Sensor for paper dust, etc. 1. Remove the paper dust, etc. from the CR
Sensor Board Encoder Sensor.
2. Check the CR Encoder Sensor Board for damages. 2. Replace the CR Encoder Sensor Board with a
new one.

Troubleshooting Overview 58
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-14. Troubleshooting of Fatal Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
At power-on At power-on, the Carriage Unit Sensor FFC 1. Check that the Sensor FFC is connected to the CR Encoder 1. Connect the Sensor FFC to the CR Encoder
moves away from the home Sensor Board connector and Main Board connector CN9. Sensor Board connector and Main Board
position and bumps against the connector CN9.
right of the Frame, then hits the
left of the Frame.

CN9

CR Encoder Sensor
Board connector

2. Check the Sensor FFC for damages. 2. Replace the Sensor FFC with a new one.
At power-on, the PF Roller PF Encoder 1. Check that the PF Encoder Sensor Holder is mounted correctly. 1. Install the PF Encoder Sensor Holder correctly.
rotates fast about a half turn. Sensor Holder
2. Check that the FFC of the PF Encoder Sensor is securely 2. Connect the PF Encoder Sensor FFC to the PF
connected to the PF Encoder Sensor Board connector and Relay Encoder Sensor Board and Relay Board
Board connector CN6. connector CN6.

CN6

PF Encoder Sensor
Board connector

3. Check the PF Encoder Sensor for paper dust, etc. 3. Remove the paper dust, etc. from the PF
Encoder Sensor.
4. Check if the PF Encoder or the FFC is damaged. 4. Replace the PF Encoder with a new one.

Troubleshooting Overview 59
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-14. Troubleshooting of Fatal Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
At power-on At power-on, the PF Roller PF Scale 1. Check that the PF Scale is inserted in the slit of the PF Encoder 1. Install the PF Scale in the slit of the PF
rotates fast about a half turn. Sensor. Encoder Sensor correctly.

PF Scale

Slit

2. Check the PF Scale for damages and dirt. 2. Replace the PF Scale with a new one.
During printing After receiving a print data, or Head FFC 1. Check that the Head FFC and the Sensor FFC are securely 1. Connect the Head FFC and the Sensor FFC to
while performing the CDR Tray Sensor FFC connected to the Main Board connectors CN9, CN11, CN12, the Main Board connectors CN9, CN11, CN12,
home position detection CN13, and CN14. CN13, and CN14.
sequence, an error is displayed on
the LED and STM3.

CN9, CN11, CN12, CN13, CN14

Troubleshooting Overview 60
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-14. Troubleshooting of Fatal Error

Occurrence Faulty Part/
Phenomenon Detail Check Point Remedy
Timing Part Name
During printing After starting to print, ink is not Head FFC 1. Check that the Head FFC is securely connected to the Print Head 1. Connect the Head FFC to the Print Head
ejected and paper stops midway. connector and Main Board connectors CN11, CN12, CN13, and connector and Main Board connectors CN11,
CN14. CN12, CN13, and CN14.

Head FFC

Print Head
connector

2. Check the Head FFC for damages. 2. Replace the Head FFC with a new one.
Ink is not ejected from most Print Head 1. Check for occurrence of Head Hot. 1. Replace the Print Head with a new one.
nozzles.

Troubleshooting Overview 61
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

3.1.2 Troubleshooting based on Observed Faults

This section provides troubleshooting procedures based on observed faults such as print quality troubles and abnormal noise.

Table 3-15. Print Quality Troubles

Faulty Part/
Observed Faults Details of the Fault Check Point Remedy
Part Name
Dot missing and Inks are not ejected from the Ink System Unit 1. Check for foreign matter around the Seal Rubber on the Cap 1. Remove the foreign matter around the Seal
mixed colors Print Head to the Cap. (Cap) Unit. Rubber completely.

Seal Rubbers

Extension Spring, 1.19 IS

2. Check that the Ink Tube is connected to the Pump Tube. 2. Connect the Ink Tube to the Pump Tube
securely.

Ink Tubes Pump Tube

Connection point

3. Check that the Extension Spring 1.19 IS is correctly installed to 3. Replace the Ink System Unit with a new one.
the Cap Unit.

Troubleshooting Overview 62
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-15. Print Quality Troubles

Faulty Part/
Observed Faults Details of the Fault Check Point Remedy
Part Name
Dot missing and Although inks are ejected from Print Head 1. Run a Nozzle Check, and check the printed pattern if it has 1. After running a Head Cleaning, check the
mixed colors the Print Head to the Cap, the broken lines or missing segments. Nozzle Check Pattern again.
trouble still occurs after
2. Check that the Head FFC is securely connected to the Print Head 2. Connect the Head FFC to the Print Head
executing a cleaning cycle or
connector and Main Board connectors CN11, CN12, CN13, and connector and Main Board connectors CN11,
replacing the Ink Cartridges.
CN14. CN12, CN13, and CN14.

Head FFC

Print Head
connector

3. Check if the Head FFC is not damaged. 3. Replace the Head FFC with a new one.
If the trouble still occurs after replacing it,
replace the Print Head with a new one.
Ink System Unit 1. Check if the Cleaner Blade is covered with paper dust or is bent. 1. Replace the Ink System Unit with a new one.
Cleaner Blade

Cleaner Blade

Main Board 1. Check the Main Board for damages. 1. Replace the Main Board with a new one.

Troubleshooting Overview 63
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-15. Print Quality Troubles

Faulty Part/
Observed Faults Details of the Fault Check Point Remedy
Part Name
Horizontal or vertical Although inks are ejected from Head FFC 1. Check that the Head FFC is securely connected to the Print Head 1. Connect the Head FFC to the Print Head
banding / Getting the Print Head to the Cap, almost connector and Main Board connectors CN10, CN12, CN13, and connector and Main Board connectors CN10,
smeared nothing is printed or the print CN14. CN12, CN13, and CN14.
gets smeared with excessive ink
after executing a cleaning cycle
or replacing the Ink Cartridges.

Head FFC

Print Head
connector

Print Head 1. Check if the print quality recovers after running a cleaning or 1. Run the cleaning and replace the Ink Cartridges
replacing the Ink Cartridges. several times. If the trouble still occurs, replace
the Print Head with a new one.
Main Board 2. Check the Main Board for damages. 2. Replace the Main Board with a new one.

Troubleshooting Overview 64
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-15. Print Quality Troubles

Faulty Part/
Observed Faults Details of the Fault Check Point Remedy
Part Name
Vertical or horizontal The printout has banding vertical Adjustment 1. For printing in the Bi-D mode, check that the Bi-D Adjustment 1. Perform Bi-D Adjustment to eliminate
banding / Color to the CR moving direction and has been performed properly. displacements between the upper and lower
shading is not evenly colored. lines.
Refer to Chapter 5 "Adjustment".
Direction of CR
Print Head 1. Run a Nozzle Check, and check the printed pattern if it has 1. Perform the Head Cleaning, then check the
movement
broken lines or missing segments. Nozzle Check Pattern.
Refer to Chapter 5 "Adjustment".
If the trouble still occurs, replace the Print Head
with a new one.
Carriage Shaft 1. Check the surfaces of the Carriage Shaft for foreign matter. 1. Remove foreign matter from the Carriage Shaft.
* If the trouble still occurs after 2. Check that the Carriage Shaft is fully lubricated with grease. 2. Wipe the grease applied to the Carriage Shaft
doing all measures described with a dry, soft cloth, and then apply G-71
in the right-hand columns, grease.
replace the CR Motor with a Refer to Chapter 6 "Maintenance".
new one.
3. Check that the Carriage Shaft is mounted horizontally. 3. Reassemble the Carriage Shaft correctly.
4. Check the Carriage Shaft for damages. 4. Replace the Carriage Shaft with a new one.
Narrow stripes of the same width Printer Driver and 1. Check if appropriate paper is used in accordance with the Printer 1. Use the appropriate type of paper in accordance
appear horizontally to the CR the Paper Driver settings. with the Printer Driver.
moving direction.
Print Head 1. Run a Nozzle Check, and check the printed pattern if it has 1. Perform the Head Cleaning, then check the
broken lines or missing segments. Nozzle Check Pattern.
Direction of CR
movement Refer to Chapter 5 "Adjustment".
If the trouble still occurs, replace the Print Head
with a new one.
PF Roller Shaft 1. Check the surface of the PF Roller Shaft for foreign matter. 1. Clean the PF Roller surface carefully.
2. Check the PF Roller Shaft for damages. 2. Replace the PF Roller with a new one.

* If the trouble still occurs after

doing all measures described
in the right-hand columns,
replace the PF Motor with a
new one.

Troubleshooting Overview 65
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-15. Print Quality Troubles

Faulty Part/
Observed Faults Details of the Fault Check Point Remedy
Part Name
Vertical or horizontal When printing at 360 dpi, Adjustment 1. Check that PF Adjustment has executed properly. 1. Perform PF Adjustment properly.
banding / Color horizontal banding and color Refer to Chapter 5 "Adjustment".
shading unevenness appears at a constant
2. Check for Dot missing. 2. Replace the Ink System Unit with a new one.
frequency.
Star Wheel Rollers traces appear Paper EJ Frame 1. Check that the Star Wheel Units have not come off or the Star 1. Install the Star Wheel Units to the Paper EJ
in the CR moving direction. Assy. Wheel Rollers turns normally. Frame Assy correctly.

Star Wheel Rollers

Star Wheel Units

Printout is faint or blurry. Printer Driver and 1. Check that adequate paper is used according to the setting of the 1. Use the appropriate type of paper in accordance
the Paper Printer Driver. with the Printer Driver.
Print Head 1. Using the Adjustment Program, check that the correct Head ID has 1. Using the Adjustment Program, enter the 29-
been written to the EEPROM. digit code of the Head ID to the EEPROM.
Refer to Chapter 5 "Adjustment".
The bottom of the printout is not Adjustment 1. Check if the Positioning Adjustment of PF Roller Shaft Retainer 1. Make adjustments according to the specified
evenly colored. has been performed properly. adjustment priority.
Refer to Chapter 5 "Adjustment".
Paper EJ Roller Traces of the Paper EJ Roller Printer Driver and 1. Check if appropriate paper is used in accordance with the Printer 1. Use the appropriate type of paper in accordance
traces appear on the appear on the printed paper or the Paper Driver settings. with the Printer Driver.
printout. CDR.
Front and Rear 1. Check if the Paper EJ Roller is clean or not. 1. Clean the Paper EJ Roller with a soft cloth.
Paper EJ Roller
Assys.

Troubleshooting Overview 66
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-15. Print Quality Troubles

Faulty Part/
Observed Faults Details of the Fault Check Point Remedy
Part Name
The printout is The non-printed side or the Front Paper 1. Check that heaps of ink are not formed on the Front Paper Guide 1. If heaps of ink are formed, replace the Front
stained with ink. bottom of the printout is dirty Guide Pad Pad and that the Front Paper Guide Pad is installed securely and Paper Guide. If it has been confirmed that the
with ink. evenly in the setting position. Ink pads have risen, reinstall the Front Paper
Guide Pad correctly.

Front Paper Guide Pad Front Paper Guide

When the paper size in the sent PW sensor 1. Check that the PW Sensor FFC is connected. 1. Connect the PW Sensor FFC.
print data is larger than the size
2. Check that the PW Sensor is not faulty. 2. Replace the PW Sensor with a new one.
of the fed paper, data are printed
on the Front Paper Guide,
extending off the paper.
Ink smudges appear on the blank Paper EJ Frame 1. Check the Star Wheel Rollers for ink stain. 1. Clean the Star Wheel Rollers with a soft cloth.
area of the printout. Assy.
Front Paper 1. Check the Front Paper Guide for ink stain. 1. Clean the Front Paper Guide with a soft cloth.
Guide
Front Paper 1. Check if ink heaps are formed on the Front Paper Guide Pad. 1. Replace the Front Paper Guide with a new one.
Guide Pad

Troubleshooting Overview 67
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-15. Print Quality Troubles

Faulty Part/
Observed Faults Details of the Fault Check Point Remedy
Part Name
The printout is Ink smudges appear on the blank Front and Rear 1. Check the Front and Rear Paper EJ Roller Assys for ink stain. 1. Clean the Front and Rear Paper EJ Roller Assys
stained with ink. area of the printout. Paper EJ Roller with a soft cloth.
Driven Roller Shaft
Assys

Front Paper EJ Roller Assy Rear Paper EJ Roller Assy

Driven Roller 1. Check the Driven Roller Shaft for ink stain. 1. Clean the Driven Roller Shaft with a soft cloth.
Shaft
Ink System Unit 1. Check that wiping operation was performed properly. 1. Install the Cleaner blade correctly or replace it
with a new one.

Cleaner Blade

Troubleshooting Overview 68
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-15. Print Quality Troubles

Faulty Part/
Observed Faults Details of the Fault Check Point Remedy
Part Name
The printout is Ink smudges appear on the blank PF Roller Shaft 1. Check the PF Roller Shaft for ink stain. 1. Clean the PF Roller Shaft with a soft cloth.
stained with ink. area of the printout.

PF Roller Shaft

The printout is Images are printed grainy in all Adjustment 1. Check that PG, Bi-D and Head Angular Adjustments have been 1. Make the adjustments according to the
grainy. print modes. Or the image looks Main Board made properly. specified adjustment priority.
rough. Print Head Refer to Chapter 5 "Adjustment".
2. Print the adjustment check patterns and check if they are grainy. 2. If the images look still grainy after adjustment,
replace the Main Board with a new one.
When printed at 5760 dpi, the Adjustment 1. After making sure that PG, Bi-D and Head Angular Adjustments 1. Make the adjustment according to the specified
printed images are poor or Main Board have been made correctly, check whether PW Sensor has been adjustment priority.
grainy. Print Head adjusted properly. Refer to Chapter 5 "Adjustment".
2. Print the adjustment check patterns and check if the printed 2. If the image quality does not improve after the
images are still poor or grainy. adjustment, replace the Print Head and Main
Board in this order, and check the image
graininess.
Regarding hue of The whole image is reddish. Adjustment 1. Check if the PG has been adjusted properly. 1. Make the adjustment according to the specified
images Print Head adjustment priority.
Refer to Chapter 5 "Adjustment".
2. Check that Bi-D and Head Angular Adjustments have been 2. Make the adjustments according to the
made properly. specified adjustment priority.
Refer to Chapter 5 "Adjustment".
3. Print the adjustment check patterns and check the image color. 3. If the image color does not change after
adjustment, replace the Print Head with a new
one.

Troubleshooting Overview 69
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 3-15. Print Quality Troubles

Faulty Part/
Observed Faults Details of the Fault Check Point Remedy
Part Name
Borderless Printing Cannot make a borderless PW sensor 1. Check if the paper dust or scrap of the paper is attached to the 1. Remove the paper dust or scrap of the paper.
printing (The printer prints with Front Paper Guide.
margins despite the borderless
2. Check that the PW Sensor is operating normally. 2. If it is judged that the clip function is not
setting).
Print the adjustment check patterns with the Adjustment executed normally, replace the PW sensor with
Program, and check that the clip function is executed normally. a new one.
(The clip function is executed normally if an about 5mm margin Refer to Chapter 5 "Adjustment".
is provided on the left of the first gray band pattern in the
patterns.)

Table 3-16. Abnormal Noise

Faulty Part/
Occurrence Timing Details of the Fault Check Point Remedy
Part Name
– Printing operation is performed Adjustment 1. Check that PF Belt Tension Adjustment has been executed 1. Make the adjustment according to the specified
normally but abnormal noise is properly. adjustment priority.
produced at power-on or during Refer to Chapter 5 "Adjustment".
operations.
Carriage Shaft 1. Check that the Carriage Shaft is fully lubricated with grease. 1. Wipe the grease applied to the Carriage Shaft
with a dry, soft cloth, and then apply grease (G-
71).
Refer to Chapter 6 "Maintenance".

Troubleshooting Overview 70
 CHAPTER

4
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.1 Overview W A R N IN G  Wear protective goggles to protect your eyes from ink. If ink
gets in your eyes, wash your eyes with clean water and see a
This chapter describes procedures for disassembling and assembling this product. doctor.
Unless otherwise specified, the disassembled units or main components can be  To prevent injury from sharp metal edges, always wear gloves
reassembled by reversing the disassembling procedure. for disassembly and reassembly.
 WARNINGs must be followed to avoid personal injury or death.  If ink has adhered to your skin, wash it with soap and water. If
it has caused skin irritation, see a doctor.
 CAUTIONs must be followed to avoid damaging the printer or test equipment.
 To protect the microprocessors and circuitry, use static
 ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED indicates that specific mandatory adjustments must discharge equipment, such as anti-static wrist straps when
be carried out to complete the repair. accessing the internal components.
 CHECK POINTs emphasize a particularly important process or procedure.
 REASSEMBLY notes provide helpful tips on reassembly procedures, especially
when correct reassembly differs from simple reverse-assembly.
When you need to disassemble any units or parts that are not described in this chapter,
refer to the exploded diagrams in the Appendix.
Before starting your work, always read the precautions described in the next section.

C A U T IO N  Use only the recommended tools for disassembly, reassembly

and adjustment.
4.1.1 Precautions Refer to Table 4-1 "List of Tools".
Before starting the disassembling/reassembling work of this product, always read the  Tighten screws to the specified torques.
following "WARNING" and "CAUTION" carefully.  Use the specified lubricants and adhesives.
Refer to Chapter 6 "Maintenance".
W A R N IN G  Before starting the disassembling/reassembling work of this  Make the necessary adjustments under the instructions given
product, always disconnect the power cable. for disassembling.
When the power supply cable must be connected for voltage Refer to Chapter 5 "Adjustment".
measurement or like, be extremely careful not to get an electric  When using compressed air products; such as air duster, for
shock and follow the procedures in this manual to do your cleaning during repair and maintenance, the use of such
work. products containing flammable gas is prohibited.

Disassembly And Assembly Overview 72

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.1.2 Tools 4.1.4 Making a Special Tool for CSIC Board

The following table indicates the tools recommended for use for disassembly, If using the special tool below, the CSIC Assy (refer to p.96) can be easily removed.
reassembly and adjustment. The method for making the tool is described below.
Table 4-1. List of Tools 1. Prepare a handle part of a clip, or a similar metal wire piece.
Tool Name Code
Handle part
Phillips Screw Driver, No.1 1080530
Phillips Screw Driver, No.2 -
Flathead Screwdriver -
Tweezers -
Needle nose pliers -
Nipper -
Clip
Acetate Tape -
PF Tension Measuring Tool 1294120 Figure 4-1. Making the Special Tool for CSIC Board (1)
Penlight -
2. Bend the metal wire as shown below.
Note : All of the tools listed above are commercially available. EPSON provides the tools
listed with EPSON tool code.
25mm 7mm
4.1.3 Screws
The following table lists the screws used in this product. When disassembling and
reassembling the printer, refer to the following table and use the specified screws in the
specified positions.

Table 4-2. List of Screw Types 50mm

Special Tool
No. Name No. Name
1) C.B.P. M3x10 2) C.B.S. M3x6
3) C.B.S. (P2) M3x10 4) C.B.P. M3x8
5) C.B.S. M3x8 6) C.B.S. (P4) M3x8
7) C.B.P. M2.6x8 8) C.B.S. (P4) M3x6
9) C.B.P. M3x6 10) C.B.S. M3x10
Figure 4-2. Making the Special Tool for CSIC Board (2)
11) C.C. M3x4 12) C.P.B. (P1) M1.7x5
13) C.B.P. M2.6x5 14) C.B.P. M2.6x5

Disassembly And Assembly Overview 73

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.1.5 Work Completion Checklist

Whenever the printer is serviced, use the checklist shown below to confirm all work is completed properly and the printer is ready to be returned to the user.

Table 4-3. Work Completion Check

Classification Item Check Point Check Field
Main Unit Self-test Is the operation normal? Checked / Not necessary
On-line Test Is the printing attempt successful? Checked / Not necessary
Printhead Is ink discharged normally from all the nozzles? Checked / Not necessary
Carriage Mechanism Does it move smoothly? Checked / Not necessary
Are there any abnormal noises during its operation? Checked / Not necessary
Are there any dirt or foreign objects on the CR Shaft? Checked / Not necessary
Is the CR Motor at the correct temperature? (Not too hot to touch?) Checked / Not necessary
Paper Feeding Is paper advanced smoothly? Checked / Not necessary
Mechanism
No paper jamming? Checked / Not necessary
No paper skew? Checked / Not necessary
No multiple-sheet feeding? Checked / Not necessary
Is the PF Motor at correct temperature? (Not too hot to touch?) Checked / Not necessary
No abnormal noises? Checked / Not necessary
Is the paper path free of obstructions? Checked / Not necessary
Adjustment Specified Adjustment Are all the adjustments correctly completed? Checked / Not necessary
Lubrication Specified Lubrication Has lubrication been applied at the specified points? Checked / Not necessary
Is the amount of lubrication correct? Checked / Not necessary
Function ROM Version Version: Checked / Not necessary
Packing Ink Cartridge Have the ink cartridges been installed correctly? Checked / Not necessary
Protective Materials Have all relevant protective materials been attached to the printer? Checked / Not necessary
Others CDR Tray Is the operation normal? Checked / Not necessary
Accessories Have all the accessories sent by the user been included in the Checked / Not necessary
package?

Disassembly And Assembly Overview 74

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.1.5.1 Protection for Transportation (Securing the Carriage) 4.1.6 Locking/Unlocking the Carriage and Opening/
(T.B.D) Closing the CDR Tray Base
Before packing the printer to be returned to the user, attach several pieces of strong
Locking/releasing the Carriage and opening/closing the CDR Tray Base are mutually
tape to the carriage to prevent damage during transportation.
related. The CDR Tray Base cannot be opened when the Carriage Lock is released.
1. Attach one side of the 40mm-length portion of the tape without folded end to the Lock the Carriage in the following procedure, when opening the CDR Tray Base.
left side of the carriage aligning the tape’s corner with the carriage’s ribs as shown 1. Remove the Decoration Plate Right. (Refer to 4.2.6 Decoration Plate Left/Right
below.
(p.82))
2. Move the carriage to the right until it hits the Carriage Lock and hold it as it is, 2. Insert a phillips screwdriver into the hole on the right side of the frame, and rotate
then attach the folded side of the tape to the housing. the white shaft of the Ink System Unit.

Table 4-4. Relationship between Carriage Lock/Release and CDR Tray Base
Direction of
Carriage CDR Tray Base
Rotation
Can be
Clockwise (CW) Locked
opened/closed.
Counterclockwise
T.B.D (CCW)
Unlocked Locked

CCW

Figure 4-3. Securing the Carriage

CW

White Shaft

Figure 4-4. Unlock the Carriage

C H E C K The CDR Tray Base and the Front Cover are opened/closed
P O IN T together.

Disassembly And Assembly Overview 75

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

C A U T IO N When moving the Carriage Unit with the Front Cover and CD- R
Tray Base opened, turn the PG CAM (Right) beforehand so that
PG++ points downwards to release the PG in order to prevent
interference between the Paper EJ Frame Assy and Carriage Unit.

Carriage Unit

Point of
Interference

PG Cam (Right)

Paper EJ Frame

PG++ position
Figure 4-5. Interference between the Frame and Carriage Unit

Disassembly And Assembly Overview 76

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.1.7 Disassembly
The flowchart below lists the step-by-step disassembly procedures. When disassembling each unit, refer to the page number shown in the figure.

Start
C H E C K  The boxes shown in a dotted-line are not the shortest
Rear Housing Front Decoration Paper Support Assy Stacker Assy
P O IN T procedures, but are necessary to proceed to the next step.
(p.79) Plate Left/Right Panel Unit (p.80)
(p.79)
(p.78) (p.78)
 Since a prototype was used to illustrate these disassembly
and assembly procedures, the appearance of some parts
Front Decoration Cover Open Sensor
Plate Left/Right (p.138) may differ from those on an actual product.
(p.79)
 Stylus Photo R1900 was used to illustrate these
Decoration Plate
disassembly and assembly procedures. The appearance of
Left/Right (p.82) some parts differ from those on Stylus Photo R2880,
however, there is no difference in the procedures.
Panel Unit (p.80)

Upper Housing /
Printer Cover
(p.83)

Upper Housing Board Assy (Main Printhead /

Support Assy High Voltage Module LED Board (p.88) CR Scale (p.92)
Board/Power Supply APG Assy (p.91) CR Motor (p.131) PF Encoder (p.134) CSIC Assy
(p.85) (p.89)
Board) (p.86) (p.94)

Lower Housing /
Printer Mechanism CR Scale (p.92)
(p.98) Paper EJ Frame
Assy / Front Cover /
CDR Tray Base
Waste Ink Pad / (p.114)
Front Paper Guide PictBridge Holder LED Board (p.88)
ASF Assy (p.108) PF Motor (p.132) Waste Ink Tube Left/ Foot (p.113)
Pad (p.111) Assy (p.113)
Right (p.112)

Front Paper Guide / Paper CDR Release Lever

APG Assy (p.91) PE Sensor Holder ASF Motor (p.133) CDR Sensor (p.136) APG Assy (p.91)
EJ Roller / Front Paper
(p.137) Sub Assy (p.116)
Guide Pad Tray (p.121)

Carriage Shaft /
Release Holder Assy Ink System Unit
PF Encoder (p.134) Carriage Unit
(p.127) (p.118) (p.100)

FLAG Release Assy Ink Mark Sensor /

Upper Paper Guide CR Encoder (p.134)
(p.128) PW sensor (p.135)
Assys (p.129)

PE Sensor Holder PF Roller Shaft

(p.137) (p.124)

Upper Paper
Guide Assys
(p.129)
Figure 4-6. Disassembly Flowchart

Disassembly And Assembly Overview 77

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.2 Removing the Housings 4.2.2 Stacker Assy

1. To disengage the guide pin on the right of the Stacker Assy, push the Stopper in
4.2.1 Paper Support Assy the direction of the arrow with a flathead screwdriver or similar tool.

1. While pulling out the left and right guide pins of the Paper Support Assy, remove 2. Pull out the left guide pin of the Stacker Assy, and remove the Stacker Assy.
the Paper Support Assy.

Guide pin Guide pin

Paper Support Assy

Hole

Guide pin

Stopper

Figure 4-7. Removing the Paper Support Assy Stacker Assy

Guide pins

Figure 4-8. Removing Stacker Assy

Disassembly And Assembly Removing the Housings 78

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.2.3 Front Decoration Plate Left/Right 4.2.4 Rear Housing

1. Open the Stacker Assy. 1. Remove the two C.B.P. M3 x 10 screws and the C.B.S. M3 x 6 screw that secure
the Rear Housing.
2. While releasing the hook on the Front Decoration Plate Left, open the plate in the
direction of the arrow, and remove it. 2. Disengage the two tabs from the Upper Housing and remove the Rear Housing.
3. In the same way, remove the Front Decoration Plate Right.

Tab Tab

Hook
Front Decoration Plate Left

1) C.B.P. M3x10

Figure 4-9. Removing the Front Decoration Plate Left/Right

2) C.B.S. M3x6

When installing the Front Decoration Plate L/R, insert the two
hooks at the bottom of them into the holes of the Lower housing,
then secure the Front Decoration Plate L/R with the other hooks.
Rear Housing

Figure 4-11. Removing the Rear Housing

Hook

Figure 4-10. Reinstalling the Front Decoration Plate Left/Right

Disassembly And Assembly Removing the Housings 79

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.2.5 Panel Unit

 Align the positioning tabs (one each on the left/right) with the
positioning holes (one each on the left/right) on the Upper 1. Open the Printer Cover.
Housing.
 Align the positioning tabs (three each on the left/right) with the C A U T IO N Before opening the Front Cover and CDR Tray Base, unlock the
positioning holes (three each on the left/right) on the Decoration Carriage. (Refer to "4.1.6 Locking/Unlocking the Carriage and
Plate Left/Right and the Lower Housing. Opening/Closing the CDR Tray Base (p75)")

Hook this to the

Upper Housing
2. Open the Front Cover and CDR Tray Base.

Printer Cover

Positioning tab

Positioning tab
Figure 4-12. Reinstalling the Rear Housing
Panel Unit

Front Cover

Figure 4-13. Removing the Panel Unit (1)

Disassembly And Assembly Removing the Housings 80

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

3. Disengage the nine hooks on the bottom of the Panel Unit, and remove the Panel
 Be careful not to get the Panel FFC caught underneath the
Unit while pulling out its tab.
hooks on the Panel Unit.
4. Remove the Panel FFC from the Panel Unit. Refer to Figure 4-15.  Secure the Panel FFC with double-sided Tape on the Panel
5. Disconnect the Panel FFC and CDR Sensor cable from the Panel Board connectors Unit.
and remove the Panel Unit.  Route the CDR Sensor cable as shown in the following figure.

Panel Unit

Panel FFC

Double-sided Tape

CDR Sensor cable

Hook
Tab
Connector

Figure 4-15. Reinstalling the Panel Unit

CDR Sensor
cable
Panel FFC

Figure 4-14. Removing the Panel Unit (2)

Disassembly And Assembly Removing the Housings 81

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.2.6 Decoration Plate Left/Right

When installing the Decoration Plate L/R, first align the hooks of
1. Remove the Rear Housing. (p.79) the Decoration Plate L/R (two each) with the ribs of the Lower
2. Remove the Front Decoration Plate Left/Right. (p.79) Housing (two each on the left/right), and then align the tab inside
the Decotrative Plate L/R (one each) with the positioning hole on the
3. Release the three hooks on the front of the Decoration Plate Right and lift the plate Upper Housing (one each on the left/right).
a little to release the tab and the four guide pins on the upper side, then remove the
Decoration Plate Right. Positioning hole
4. In the same way, remove the Decoration Plate Left.
Tab

Guide pin (x4)

Hooks and Ribs

Decoration Plate Right Figure 4-17. Reinstalling the Decoration Plate Left/Right

Tab

Hook (x3)

Figure 4-16. Removing the Decoration Plate Left/Right

Disassembly And Assembly Removing the Housings 82

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.2.7 Upper Housing / Printer Cover  Route the Panel FFC and CDR Sensor cable correctly as shown
1. Remove the Decoration Plate Left/Right. (p.82) in the following Figure.
 Install the Upper Housing so that the Grounding Plate properly
2. Remove the Panel Unit. (p.80) protrudes through the cutout of the Upper Housing.
3. Open the Front Cover and CDR Tray Base. (Refer to 4.1.6 Locking/Unlocking the
Carriage and Opening/Closing the CDR Tray Base (p.75))
4. Remove the seven C.B.P. M3 x 10 screws that secure the Upper Housing.
5. Remove the Upper Housing while pulling out the CDR Sensor cable and the Panel
FFC through the cutout of the Upper Housing.

C.B.P. M3x10 C.B.P. M3x10

Upper Housing Panel FFC

Grounding Plate

CDR Sensor cable

Upper Housing

Figure 4-19. Routing Panel FFC and CDR Sensor Cable

 Tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 4-18.

C.B.P. M3x10 C.B.P. M3x10 C.B.P. M3x10

Figure 4-18. Remove the Upper Housing

Disassembly And Assembly Removing the Housings 83

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

REMOVING THE PRINTER COVER C A U T IO N Be careful not to damage the surface in step 3 and later.

1. Remove the Upper Housing / Printer Cover. (p.83)

2. Remove the two C.B.P. M3 x 10 screws that secure Printer Cover Holder Left/
Right.

1) C.B.P. M3x10 1) C.B.P. M3x10

3. Remove the Printer Cover Holder Right following the steps below.
(6±1 kgf.cm) (6±1 kgf.cm) 3-1. Open the Printer Cover and place the Upper Housing with its backside
down.
3-2. Pull the Printer Cover in the direction of the red arrow so as to prevent the
Tabs parts of the Printer Cover Holder Right and Upper Housing shown below
Tabs
from interfering.

Upper Housing

Printer Cover Holder Right Tab

Printer Cover Holder Left Upper Housing

Printer Cover Holder Right

Figure 4-20. Removing the Printer Cover Holder Left/Right

Printer Cover interfering part

Insert the tabs (two each on the left/right) shown in Figure 4-20 into
the holes on the Upper Housing.

Interfering Parts of Printer Cover Holder

Right and Upper Housing.

Figure 4-21. Removing the Printer Cover (1)

Disassembly And Assembly Removing the Housings 84

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

C A U T IO N When performing the following steps, be careful not to damage the 4.2.8 Upper Housing Support Assy
tabs of the Printer Cover Holder Right. 1. Remove the Upper Housing / Printer Cover. (p.83)
2. Remove the two C.B.S. M3 x 8 screws and two C.B.P. M3 x 8 screws that secure
the Upper Housing Support Assy, and remove the Upper Housing Support Assy.

3-3. Slide the Printer Cover Holder Right in the direction of the arrow while
pushing the part A, and pull out the Printer Cover Holder Right from the
bearing of the Printer Cover.

C.B.P. M3x8 C.B.S. M3x8 C.B.P. M3x8

Upper Housing Support Assy

Figure 4-23. Removing the Upper Housing Support Assy

Bearing

 Secure the Grounding Plate with one of the C.B.S. M3 x 8

Figure 4-22. Removing the Printer Cover (2)
screws together with the Upper Housing as shown below.
 Route the CDR Sensor cable as shown in the figure below.
4. In the same way, remove the Printer Cover Holder Left and remove the Printer
Cover from the Upper Housing. Grounding Plate

A D J U S T M E N T If the Printer Cover creaks when opening/closing it, make sure to

R E Q U IR E D
lubricate the Printer Cover Holder Left/Right.
• “Chapter 6 Maintenance (p.163)”

Wind the CDR Sensor

cable around the rib one CDR Sensor cable
time.

Figure 4-24. Routing the CDR Sensor Cable

Disassembly And Assembly Removing the Housings 85

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.3 Removing the Boards C A U T IO N When performing the following procedure, prevent the FFC and the
cables from being scratched. If having trouble disassembling, remove
the High Voltage Module Cover to make the work easier. (refer to
4.3.1 Board Assy (Main Board/Power Supply Board) 4.3.3 High Voltage Module Step2 (p89) .)
1. Remove the Upper Housing / Printer Cover. (p.83)
2. Remove the seven screws (four C.B.S. M3 x 6, two C.B.S. (P2) M3 x 10, and one
3. Disconnect all the cables and FFCs connected on the Main Board from the near
C.B.S. M3 x 10) that secure the Board Assy.
side one by one.

14) C.B.S. M3x10 No. Connector No. Connector

(8±1 kgf.cm)
CN1 PictBridge CN14 Head FFC
7
CN4 Panel Bard, CDR Sensor, Cover CN22 CSIC
2) C.B.S. M3x6 Open Sensor
(8±1 kgf.cm)
CN5 Relay FFC (for sensor) CN25 High Voltage Module
CN6 LED Board CN115 CR Motor

1 2 3 4 CN9 Ink Mark Sensor, CR Encoder CN116 PF Motor

Sensor, PW Sensor
CN11 Head FFC CN117 Pump Motor
CN12 Head FFC CN118 APG Motor
Board Assy CN13 Head FFC CN119 ASF Motor
3) C.B.S. (P2) M3x10
(6±1 kgf.cm)

6 5
CN1
CN119 CN115
CN116
CN118
CN117 CN5
Figure 4-25. Removing the Board Assy (1) CN13 CN6
CN14
CN4
Tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 4-25. CN9 CN11
CN22 CN12
CN25

Figure 4-26. Connector Layout of the Main Board (130 Digit Side)

Disassembly And Assembly Removing the Boards 86

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4. Pull out the Board Assy from the Printer. REMOVING THE MAIN BOARD

1. Remove the Board Assy (Main Board/Power Supply Board). (p.86)

C A U T IO N When disconnecting the Power Board cable, be sure to unlock

CN60 on the Main Board.

Board Assy

Lock Unlock
Figure 4-27. Removing the Board Assy (2)
Figure 4-29. Handling the Power Board cable (CN60)

 Confirm that the FFCs do not cross each other first, then 2. Disconnect the Power Board cable from connector CN60 on the Main Board.
connect the FFCs and the cables to the Main Board while
paying attention to the edge of the Shield Plate. 3. Remove the four C.B.S. M3 x 6 screws and two C.B.P. M2.6 x 5 screws that
 Take care not to place the Board Assy onto the three Ground secure the Main Board and remove the Main Board from the Board Assy.
Plates.
2) C.B.S. M3x6

CN60

Grounding Plates

Figure 4-28. Reinstalling the Board Assy Main Board

13) C.B.P. M2.6x5

Figure 4-30. Removing the Main Board

Disassembly And Assembly Removing the Boards 87

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

REMOVING THE POWER BOARD 4.3.2 LED Board

1. Remove the Upper Housing / Printer Cover. (p.83)
1. Remove the Board Assy (Main Board/Power Supply Board). (p.86)
2. Peel off the piece of acetate tape from the LED Sheet.
C A U T IO N When disconnecting the Power Board cable, be sure to unlock
CN60 on the Main Board. LED Sheet
Acetate Tape

Lock Unlock

Figure 4-31. Handling the Power Board cable (CN60) Figure 4-33. Removing the LED Board (1)
2. Disconnect the Power Board cable from connector CN60 on the Main Board. (p.87)
3. Remove the four C.B.S. M3 x 6 screws that secure the Power Board and remove 3. Release the three tabs from the LED sheet, and open the LED sheet.
the Power Board from the Board Assy. 4. Disconnect the LED FFC from the connector on the LED Board.

LED FFC

Power Board connector LED Board Tabs

LED Sheet

Figure 4-34. Removing the LED Board (2)

2) C.B.S. M3x6
Figure 4-32. Removing the Power Board

A D J U S T M E N T After replacing or removing the Main Board and the Power Board,
R E Q U IR E D
always make the required adjustments referring to the following.
• “Chapter 5 Adjustment (p.139)”

Disassembly And Assembly Removing the Boards 88

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

5. Remove the C.B.S. (P4) M3 x 8 screw that secures the LED Board, and remove 4.3.3 High Voltage Module
the LED Board.

6) C.B.S. (P4) M3x8 W A R N IN G High voltage is applied in the High Voltage Module. The following
(6±1 kgf.cm) must be strictly observed when you handle the High Voltage
Module.
 Do not turn the power on with the Upper Housing removed.
 To avoid electrical shock, do not make or leave the High
Voltage Module Board uncovered when applying a voltage.
LED Board Tabs and positioning holes

Figure 4-35. Removing the LED Board (3) 1. Remove the Upper Housing / Printer Cover. (p.83)
2. Remove the C.B.P. M3 x 8 screw and remove the High Voltage Module Cover.
-

 Align the two tabs on the Upper Housing with the positioning
holes on the LED Board. (Refer to Figure 4-35.)
 Attach acetate tape as shown in the figure below.

Acetate Tape
4) C.B.P. M3x8
Attachment Position

18mm
High Voltage Module Cover
160mm
Hook and Positioning hole

Figure 4-37. Removing the High Voltage Module Board (1)

Figure 4-36. Reinstalling the LED Board  Before tightening the screw, make sure to engage the hook of
the High Voltage Module Cover with the positioning hole on the
Lower Housing.
 When installing the High Voltage Module Cover, be careful not
to trap any of the cables underneath the cover.

Disassembly And Assembly Removing the Boards 89

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

3. Pull off the connector of the electrode cable from its terminal on the High Voltage A D J U S T M E N T After replacing the High Voltage Module, always make the required
Module Board with long-nose pliers or the like. R E Q U IR E D
adjustments referring to the following.
4. Disconnect the High Voltage Module cable from connector CN1 on the High • “Chapter 5 Adjustment (p.139)”
Voltage Module Board.
5. Remove the C.B.P. M3 x 8 screw and remove the High Voltage Module Board.

4) C.B.P. M3x8

High Voltage
Module cable

Hook
Electrode cable terminal

CN1

Figure 4-38. Removing the High Voltage Module Board (2)

 Wind the High Voltage Module cable on the hook one time as
shown in Figure 4-38.
 Route the electrode cable as shown in the figure below.

Wind it on Electrode cable

the hook.
55±2mm

Acetate Tape

Figure 4-39. Routing the Electrode Cable

Disassembly And Assembly Removing the Boards 90

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.4 Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 4. Remove the three C.B.S. M3 x 6 screws that secure the APG Assy, and remove the
APG Assy from the Main Frame.

4.4.1 APG Assy 2) C.B.S. M3x6

(8±1 kgf.cm)
1. Remove the Upper Housing / Printer Cover. (p.83)
2. Disconnect the APG Motor connector cable from connector CN18 (red) on the
1
Main Board, and Remove the cable from the ASF Assy.
3. Disconnect the cables from the two APG Sensor connectors.

APG Motor 3
APG Assy
2
Hook the APG Motor
cable on the two tabs
of the ASF Assy.

Figure 4-41. Removing the APG Assy

 When installing the APG Assy, confirm the FLAG Release Assy
is not in the released state (with the Upper Paper Guide up).
APG Sensor connectors

CN118

Figure 4-40. Disconnecting the Cables

FLAG Release Assy

Referring to Figure 4-40, correctly route the APG connector cable.

Upper Paper Guide

Released Not Released

Figure 4-42. Reinstalling the APG Assy

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 91

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

 Match the phase of the APG Assy in the following procedure. 4.4.2 CR Scale
1.Match the delta marks of Spur Gear 16 and Combination 1. Remove the Upper Housing / Printer Cover. (p.83)
Gear 22, 28.8, 32.4.
2. Release the Carriage Lock, and move the Carriage Unit to the center.
(Refer to 4.1.6 Locking/Unlocking the Carriage and Opening/Closing the CDR
Tray Base (p.75))

C A U T IO N When performing the following procedure, take care to prevent

both ends of the CR Scale from being broken.

Combination Gear,
22, 28.8, 32.4 3. Pull the right end of the CR Scale in the direction of the arrow, and remove the CR
Scale from the tab on the Right CR Shaft Mounting Plate.
Delta Marks
4. Pull out the right end of the CR Scale towards the left direction from the rear of the
Spur Gear 16 Carriage Unit.
2. At the position where the tab can be identified through the
notch of the PG Frame, match the delta marks of Spur Gear
16 and PG Cam (Left). Carriage Unit Right CR Shaft Mounting Plate

Spur Gear 16 PG Cam (Left)

Tab Step 4 Step 3

Hook
CR Scale

Delta Marks

Figure 4-43. Phase Matching

Figure 4-44. Pulling out the CR Scale
 Tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 4-41

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 92

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

5. Remove the coil section of Torsion Spring 24.7 from the tab on the Left CR Shaft 7. Turn the CR Scale 90º, and remove it from the tab on the Left CR Shaft Mounting
Mounting Plate with tweezers. Plate.

Left CR Shaft
Mounting Plate Tab

Tab

Torsion Spring 24.7

Figure 4-45. Removing the Torsion Spring 24.7 (1)

Figure 4-47. Removing the CR Scale
6. Remove Torsion Spring 24.7 from the CR Scale by the following procedure:
6-1. Stand the coil section.
6-2. Lower the coil section downwards to remove Foot 1 from the notch on the
Left CR Shaft Mounting Plate.
6-3. Turn the coil section counterclockwise.
6-4. Remove Torsion Spring 24.7 from the hole on the CR Scale.

Step 6-1

Step 6-3
Foot 1

Notch
Step 6-2

Figure 4-46. Removing the Torsion Spring 24.7 (2)

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 93

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

 Pass the CR Scale through the slot on the CR Encoder. 4.4.3 Printhead / CSIC Assy
C A U T IO N So as not to damage the FFC, do not use any tools with the sharp
ends when removing the Cable Holder.
CR Encoder

1. Remove the Upper Housing / Printer Cover. (p.83)

2. Release the Carriage Lock, and move the Carriage Unit to the center.
(Refer to 4.1.6 Locking/Unlocking the Carriage and Opening/Closing the CDR
CR Scale Tray Base (p.75))
3. Open the Ink Cartridge Cover.
Figure 4-48. Reinstalling the CR Scale (1) 4. Cut the Hinge, Cover Cartridge with a nipper or a similar tool and remove the
upper part of the Hinge, Cover Cartridge.
 Set the left end of the CR Scale with the black mark facing
5. Remove the Ink Cartridge Cover from the Carriage Unit.
upwards.
6. Disengage the hook from the lower part of the Hinge, Cover Cartridge using a pair
Black Mark of Tweezers and remove the lower part of the Hinge, Cover Cartridge.

Ink Cartridge Cover

CR Scale
Hinge, Cover
Cartridge upper part
Figure 4-49. Reinstalling the CR Scale (2)

 Place the right end of the CR Scale correctly so that it is not

hooked onto the Right CR Shaft Mounting Plate.

Hook
OK
CR Scale
NG Hinge, Cover Cartridge
lower part
Hooked Portion

Figure 4-50. Reinstalling the CR Scale (3) Figure 4-51. Removing the Hinge, Cover Cartridge

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 94

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

7. Disengage the two hooks that secure the Ink Guide and remove the Ink Guide from
C H E C K The Hinge, Cover Cartridge can not be removed without damaging
P O IN T the Cartridge Unit.
it. Whenever replacing the Printhead, the Hinge, Cover Cartridge
must be also replaced with a new one.
Ink Guide

Hinge, Cover
Cartridge
Hook

Figure 4-52. Hinge, Cover Cartridge Figure 4-54. Removing the Ink Guide

Engage the two dowels of the Ink Cartridge Cover with the
installation holes on the Carriage Unit and Hinge, Cover Cartridge
(one each).

Ink Cartridge Cover

Dowels
Dowels

Installation holes

Figure 4-53. Reinstalling the Ink Cartridge Cover

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 95

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

8. Peel off a piece of acetate tape and disconnect the CSIC FFC from the connector 10. Using the special tool (see p.73) disengage the two hooks of the CSIC Assy on the
on the CSIC Board. right and left on the rear of the Carriage Unit and remove the CSIC Assy upward.
9. Disengage the Cable Holder from the hook and remove it.
CSIC Assy

Cable Holder

Hook
Rear of Carriage Unit

Hooks

Connector
CSIC FFC
Acetate tape

Figure 4-55. Removing the CSIC Assy (1)

C A U T IO N Before performing the following procedure, be sure to disconnect

the CSIC FFC from the connector on the CSIC board. If not, the CSIC Assy
CSIC Assy can not be removed, and the CSIC FFC may be
damaged.

Hooks

Figure 4-56. Removing the CSIC Assy (2)

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 96

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

11. Remove the three C.B.P. M2.6 x 8 that secure the Printhead using the Phillips
 Confirm that the pad is attached at the position in Figure 4-59.
Screw Driver, No.1, and vertically lift the Printhead to remove it.

Head Pad

1 2

3
Figure 4-59. Attaching the Pad

 The Printhead must be installed with its positioning holes

aligned with the guide pins of the Carriage Unit.
7) C.B.P. M2.6x8
(3±0.5 kgf.cm)

Figure 4-57. Removing the Printhead

12. Remove the two Head FFCs from the Printhead.

Printhead
Guide pins

Positioning holes

Head FFCs Figure 4-60. Reinstalling the Printhead (1)

Figure 4-58. Remove the Head FFC A D J U S T M E N T After replacing or removing the Printhead, always make the required
R E Q U IR E D
adjustments referring to the following.
• “Chapter 5 Adjustment (p.139)”

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 97

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.4.4 Lower Housing / Printer Mechanism 1) C.B.P. M3x10

4 (6±1 kgf.cm)
1. Remove the Upper Housing / Printer Cover. (p.83) Electrode cable

C A U T IO N following steps, be extremely careful not to If having trouble

disassembling, Module Cover to make the work easier. (refer to Step 5
Printer Mechanism 1
4.3.3 High Voltage Module Step2 (p89) .) 4) C.B.P. M3x8
(6±1 kgf.cm)
2

2. Disconnect the PictBridge cable from connector CN1 on the Main Board.
3. Disconnect the High Voltage Module cable from connector CN25 on the Main
Board.

PictBridge cable

CN1

Fastener Ink Tube

CN25
3
Step 4
1) C.B.P. M3x10
(6±1 kgf.cm)
High Voltage Module cable
Fastener
Waste Ink Tube

Left Rear Right Rear Shield Plate Holder

3) C.B.S. (P2) M3x10 & 3) C.B.S. (P2) M3x10
P.W.,4.3 x 0.8 x 8 (6±1 kgf.cm)
Figure 4-61. Removing the Lower Housing and Printer Mechanism (6±1 kgf.cm)

4. Grip both ends of the two Ink Tube Fasteners with your fingers, slide them in the
A
direction of the arrows, and pull out the Waste Ink Tubes from the two Ink Tubes. Step 6
B
5. Remove the C.B.P. M3 x 8 screw that secures the electrode cable on the Front 5
Paper Guide and remove the electrode cable. 1) C.B.P. M3x10
6. Remove the C.B.P. M3 x 10 screw and the C.B.S. (P2) M3 x 10 screw that secure (6±1 kgf.cm)

the Shield Plate Holder, and remove the Shield Plate Holder.
Lower Housing
7. Remove the five screws and one washer that secure the Printer Mechanism. (four
C.B.P. M3 x 10 screws, one P.W.,4.3 x 0.8 x 8 washer attached with one of the Figure 4-62. Screws that Secure the Printer Mechanism
C.B.P. screws, and one C.B.S. (P2) M3 x 10 screw)

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 98

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

C A U T IO N When performing the following step, make sure to grasp the Printer  Install the Printer Mechanism to the Lower Housing as follows.
Mechanism by the specified positions shown below. Otherwise, the (refer to Figure 4-62)
frames may become deformed.
1. Align the guide pins (x2) with the positioning holes as shown
below.
Holding Positions

Right Rear Left Rear

Positioning hole
and guide pin Positioning hole
and guide pin

Figure 4-65. Reinstalling the Printer Mechanism

2. Place the Printer Mechanism on the Lower Housing and

Figure 4-63. Handling the Printer Mechanism secure the Shield Plate Holder and the Printer Mechanism
with the screw (A).
8. Lift the Printer Mechanism grasping it by the holding positions with your hands,
3. Verify the Printer Mechanism and Lower Housing are
and remove it from the Lower Housing.
tightly engaged (no rattling), and then secure the Shield Plate
 Insert the Waste Ink Tube as shown in the figure below, and Holder to the Lower Housing.
secure it firmly with the Fastener. (refer to Figure 4-62 & 4. Secure the Printer Mechanism and Lower Housing with
Figure 4-64) screws (x5). (Tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure
4-62)
130 Digit Side Waste Ink Tube 5. Secure the electrode cable to the Front Paper Guide with the
(Shorter) 130 Digit Side Ink Tube screw.

0 Digit Side Waste Ink Tube 0 Digit Side Ink Tube joint
(Longer)

Figure 4-64. Installing the Ink Tubes

 Confirm that the PictBridge cable and the Waste Ink Tube do
not get caught in the Printer Mechanism.

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 99

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

 Attach the Label, Ink Position;B at the position in the figure 4.4.5 Carriage Shaft / Carriage Unit
below. 1. Remove the Printhead / CSIC Assy. (p.94)
2. Remove the CR Scale. (p.92)
3. Remove the LED Board. (p.88)
6mm 4. Remove the APG Assy. (p.91)
5. Rotate the PG Cam (Right) to adjust its positions other than PG++ downside.
2mm

Label, Ink Position;B

Figure 4-66. Attaching the Label, Ink Position;B

A D J U S T M E N T After replacing the Printer Mechanism, always make the required

R E Q U IR E D
adjustments referring to the following.
• “Chapter 5 Adjustment (p.139)”
PG Cam (Right)

Figure 4-67. Adjusting the PG Cam

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 100

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

6. Remove the two C.B.S. M3 x 6 screws that secure the Frame Support Plate (Left), 7. Remove the foot of Left PG Torsion Spring from tab A, and remove the coil
and remove it. section from tab B to remove Left PG Torsion Spring from the Main Frame.

Paper EJ Frame Assy Tab A

Notch Left PG Torsion Spring

Left Frame Support Plate

Tab

Tab B
2) C.B.S. M3x6
(8±1 kgf.cm) 2
Tabs

Figure 4-68. Removing the Left Frame Support Plate Figure 4-69. Removing the Left PG Torsion Spring

8. Remove the foot of Right PG Torsion Spring from tab A, and remove the coil
 Insert the Left Frame Support Plate into the notch on the Main section from tab B to remove the Right PG Torsion Spring from the Main Frame.
Frame. See Figure 4-68.
 Align the two tabs on the Main Frame and the tab on the Paper
EJ Frame Assy with the three positioning holes on the Frame
Tab A Right PG Torsion Spring
Support Plate (Left). See Figure 4-68.
 Align the tab (rear side) of the Left Frame Support Plate with the
outside of the Left CR Shaft Mounting Plate. See Figure 4-68.
 Tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 4-68

Tab B

Figure 4-70. Removing the Right PG Torsion Spring

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 101

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

10. Remove the extension spring for the Driven Pulley Holder from the Main Frame
Place the feet of Left PG Torsion Spring and Right PG Torsion
and the tab on the Drive Pulley Holder with needle-nose pliers.
Spring on the Carriage Shaft.

Left Side Right Side Driven Pulley Holder Extension spring for the
Driven Pulley Holder

Foot

Tabs

Foot

Figure 4-71. Reinstalling PG Torsion Springs

Figure 4-73. Removing the Extension Spring for the Driven Pulley Holder
9. Remove CR Shaft Mounting Plate Fixed Spring from the tab and notch on the
Main Frame, and pull out the spring in the direction of the arrow.
11. Slide Driven Pulley Holder to the right end of the notch on the Main Frame, and
CR Shaft Mounting Plate Fixed Spring Remove the Driven Pulley Holder toward you.
Tab

Notch (rear side) Driven

Driven Pulley
Pulley Holder
Notch

Figure 4-72. Removing CR Shaft Mounting Plate Fixed Spring

Insert the foot of CR Shaft Mounting Plate Fixed Spring into the Figure 4-74. Removing the Driven Pulley Holder
notch on the Main Frame (rear side). (See Figure 4-72.)

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 102

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

12. Remove the CR Drive Belt from the CR Motor Pinion Gear. 14. Loosen the C.B.S. (P4) M3 x 8 screw that secures the Left Parallelism Adjust
Bushing, and rotate the Bushing toward the front of the Printer Mechanism to
prevent interference between the Flag of the Parallelism Adjust Bushing and the
CR Drive Belt Left PG Cam.

Flag of the Parallelism Adjust Bushing (Left)

6) C.B.S. (P4) M3x8

Left PG Cam (5±1 kgf.cm)

CR Motor Pinion Gear

Figure 4-75. Removing the CR Drive Belt

13. Remove the four C.B.S. (P4) M3 x 6 screws that secure the CR Guide Plate, and
remove it from the Main Frame.

8) C.B.S. (P4) M3x6 8) C.B.S. (P4) M3x6 Figure 4-77. Rotating the Left Parallelism Adjust Bushing
(8±1 kgf.cm) CR Guide Plate (8±1 kgf.cm)

15. Slide the Left CR Shaft Mounting Plate upwards, and release the tab on the Left
4 3 2 1
CR Shaft Mounting Plate from the notch on the Main Frame to rotate the
Mounting Plate toward you.

Left CR Shaft
Mounting Plate

Tab

Tabs

Figure 4-76. Removing the CR Guide Plate

 Align the positioning holes on the CR Guide Plate with the

seven tabs on the Main Frame. See Figure 4-76.
 Tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 4-76.
Figure 4-78. Rotating the Left CR Shaft Mounting Plate

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 103

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

16. Lift the Carriage Shaft upwards, and remove the Carriage Shaft Spacer from the 18. Lift the Carriage Shaft within the hole on the Main Frame, and remove the Spacer
Carriage Shaft with tweezers. and Left PG Cam from the Carriage Shaft.

PG Cam (Left)

Carriage Shaft Spacer

Hole on Main
Frame
Carriage
Shaft
Spacer

Figure 4-79. Removing the Carriage Shaft Spacer Figure 4-81. Removing Left PG Cam

17. Rotate the Left CR Shaft Mounting Plate toward you to remove the Bushing on the 19. Remove the Spacer and Right PG Cam from the Carriage Shaft.
Left CR Shaft Mounting Plate from the Carriage Shaft.

Right PG Cam

Bushing

Spacer

Left CR Shaft
Mounting Plate
Figure 4-82. Removing Right PG Cam
Figure 4-80. Removing the Left CR Shaft Mounting Plate

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 104

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Install the Right PG Cam so that one of these positions marked "0", C A U T IO N When performing the following procedure, take care not to scratch
"+" or "++" faces downward. the Carriage Shaft.

21. Slide the Carriage Unit to the left side to prevent the CR Scale Cover from
interfering with the rear of the Carriage Unit, slide the Carriage Shaft to the left
side and pull out its right end from the Main Frame, and pull out the Carriage Shaft
from the Main Frame and Carriage Unit.

Point of
Interference
Figure 4-83. Right PG Cam Installation Direction

20. Pull the Right CR Shaft Mounting Plate away from the tab on the Main Frame and
rotate toward you. CR Scale Cover Carriage Shaft

Right CR Shaft
Mounting Plate Carriage 3
Unit

2 1
Tabs

Figure 4-84. Rotating the Right CR Shaft Mounting Plate Figure 4-85. Removing the Carriage Shaft

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 105

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

23. Remove the Belt Holder from the Carriage unit.

 Set the longer end of the Carriage Shaft to the left side.
 When the Carriage Shaft is removed, the Plain Spring and Leaf
Spring that are attached to the right end of the Carriage Shaft
may drop off. In such case, be sure to attach them in the order
as shown in the figure below.
Belt Holder

Carriage Shaft Leaf Spring Plain Spring

Left Side Right

Side

Longer Shorter

Figure 4-86. Reinstalling the Carriage Shaft

Figure 4-88. Removing the Belt Holder

22. Turn the Belt Holder Mounting Plate in the direction of the arrow, and remove it
from the Carriage Unit.
24. Release the CR Encoder Board Holder from the three Tabs to remove it from the
Carriage Unit.

Belt Holder Mounting

Plate

Tabs

CR Encoder Board Holder

Figure 4-87. Removing the Belt Holder Mounting Plate

Figure 4-89. Removing the Belt Holder

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 106

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

25. Disconnect the Sensor FFC from the connector on the CR Encoder Board, pull out A D J U S T M E N T After replacing or removing the Carriage Shaft and Carriage Unit,
the Sensor FFC from the Carriage Unit, and remove the Carriage Unit. R E Q U IR E D
always make the required adjustments referring to the following.
• “Chapter 5 Adjustment (p.139)”
Sensor FFC

CR Encoder Board

Figure 4-90. Removing the Carriage Unit

 When the Carriage Unit is removed from the Printer

Mechanism, the CR Pad may drop off. In such case, correctly
install it referring to the figure below.

CR Pad

Figure 4-91. Reinstalling the CR Pad

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 107

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.4.6 ASF Assy 5. Disconnect all the cables and the FFCs from the connectors on the Relay Board.
 CN1 : Relay FFC
1. Remove the Printer Mechanism. (Refer to 4.4.4 Lower Housing / Printer
Mechanism (p.98))  CN2 : PE Sensor cable
 CN4 : APG Sensor cable (lower side)
2. Remove the C.B.S. M3 x 8 screw that secures the Earth cables on the right rear  CN5 : APG Sensor cable (upper side)
side of the printer, and remove the Earth cables.
 CN6 : PF Encoder Sensor FFC
3. Disconnect the ASF Motor connector from the Relay connector.
C A U T IO N When performing the following steps, be extremely careful not to
4. Disconnect the Relay connector cable from the ASF Assy.
damage the cables. If having trouble disassembling, remove the
High Voltage Module Cover to make the work easier. (refer to 4.3.3
ASF Assy
High Voltage Module Step2 (p89) .)
ASF Motor
Relay 6. Disconnect the FFC bundled by the acetate tape from the CN6 to CN22 on the
connector Main Board, and release it from the groove on the ASF Assy.
7. Disconnect the APG Motor cable and PE Sensor cable from the ASF Assy.
Relay 8. Peel off the PF Encoder FFC secured by two pieces of double-sided adhesive tape
connector
cable from the ASF Assy.

Double-
sided PF Encoder Sensor FFC
Tapes

Ferrite Core Groove

5) C.B.S. M3x8 Earth cables
(8±1 kgf.cm)

APG Motor cable

Figure 4-92. Releasing the Cables (1) PE Sensor cable

 Secure the two Earth cables together with the screw. Acetate Tape
Relay Board
 Referring to Figure 4-92, correctly route the Relay connector
cable.

Main Board CN6 to CN22

Figure 4-93. Releasing the Cables (2)

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 108

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Referring to Figure 4-93, correctly route each of the cables and Align the guide pins and tabs on the Guide Roller LDs with the
FFCs. positioning holes on the Main Frame. (Refer to Figure 4-95.)

C H E C K When only removing the ASF Assy, you do not need to perform 11. Remove the three C.B.S. (P4) M3 x 8 screws that secure the ASF Assy, and
P O IN T "5.2.5 ASF Guide Roller LDs Position Adjustment (p161)". In that remove the ASF Assy from the Printer Mechanism.
case, mark the installing positions of the Guide Roller LDs before
removing them, and make sure to align the markings when ASF Assy
installing the Guide Roller LDs.

Figure 4-94. Marking Position

9. Remove the two C.B.S. M3 x 6 screws that secure the two Guide Roller LDs. 1
6) C.B.S. (P4) M3x8
10. Gently pull the LD Roller Shaft to the rear of the printer, and remove the Guide (6±1 kgf.cm)
Roller LDs.
6) C.B.S. (P4) M3x8
Front 2) C.B.S. M3x6 (6±1 kgf.cm) 34
Face (8±1 kgf.cm)

2
Guide Roller LD

Figure 4-96. Removing the ASF Assy

Tab Guide pin

LD Roller Shaft Guide Roller LD

Figure 4-95. Removing the Guide Roller LD

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 109

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

 Align the guide pin and four Tabs on the ASF Assy with the A D J U S T M E N T After replacing or removing the ASF Assy, always make the required
R E Q U IR E D
positioning holes on the Main Frame so that there is no gap adjustments referring to the following.
between the ASF Assy and the Main Frame. • “Chapter 5 Adjustment (p.139)”

Guide pins
Tab

Tab

Tab

Tab

Figure 4-97. Reinstalling the ASF Assy

 Tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 4-96.

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 110

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.4.7 Front Paper Guide Pad After installing the Front Paper Guide Pads and Front Paper Guide
1. Remove the Printer Mechanism. (Refer to 4.4.4 Lower Housing / Printer Pad Protection, lift the Printer Mechanism, and check the following
Mechanism (p.98)) points.
1. Make sure that the tabs on the Pads are not cut midway.
2. Remove the Front Paper Guide Pads and Front Paper Guide Pad Protection from
2. Make sure that all tabs are in place on the Front Paper Guide,
the Front Paper Guide with tweezers.
and that they are facing down (towards the Waste Ink Pads)
without any folds.
3. Make sure that the tab foldbacks are protruding completely
from the Front Paper Guide.

Tabs
Tabs

Paper Guide Pad Front Paper Guide

Figure 4-99. Reinstalling the Front Paper Guide Pad (1)

Front Paper Guide 4. Make sure that the pad is placed under a tab of the Front Paper
Pad Protection
Guide.

OK NG

Figure 4-98. Removing the Front Paper Guide Pads and

the Front Paper Guide Pad Protection
Figure 4-100. Reinstalling the Front Paper Guide Pad (2)
C A U T IO N Take care to prevent the grease contained on the Front Paper
Guide Pads and Front Paper Guide Pad Protection from sticking to 5. Make sure that all the tabs on the pads are fitted into the
other parts. securing section under the Front Paper Guide.

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 111

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.4.8 Waste Ink Pad / Waste Ink Tube Left/Right  Check the positions and the routing of the upper and lower
1. Remove the Printer Mechanism. (Refer to 4.4.4 Lower Housing / Printer Waste Ink Tubes.
Mechanism (p.98)) 0 digit side : Lower side
130 digit side : Upper side
2. Remove the C.B.P. M3 x 8 screw that secures the Ink Tube Holder, and remove
the Ink Tube Holder.
Waste Ink Tubes
3. Remove the 12 Waste Ink Pads from the Lower Housing. Waste Ink Tubes
4. Remove the Waste Ink Tube Left/Right from the Lower Housing.
10±1mm 10±1mm
130 Digit Side 0 Digit Side
Waste Ink Pad

Figure 4-102. Positions of Waste Ink Tubes

A D J U S T M E N T After replacing or removing the Waste Ink Pads, always make the
R E Q U IR E D
required adjustments referring to the following.
• “Chapter 5 Adjustment (p.139)”

Ink Tube Holder

4) C.B.P. M3x8
(6±1 kgf.cm)

Figure 4-101. Removing the Waste Ink Pad

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 112

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.4.9 Foot 4.4.10 PictBridge Holder Assy

1. Remove the Printer Mechanism. (Refer to 4.4.4 Lower Housing / Printer 1. Remove the Printer Mechanism. (Refer to 4.4.4 Lower Housing / Printer
Mechanism (p.98)) Mechanism (p.98))
2. Remove the six foot at the backside of the Lower Housing. 2. Remove the two C.B.P. M3 x 8 screws that secure the PictBridge Holder Assy and
remove the PictBridge Holder Assy.

Grounding
Plate
PictBridge Holder Assy

Slit and tab

Foot

4) C.B.P. M3x8
(6±1 kgf.cm)
Figure 4-103. Removing the Foot Figure 4-104. Removing the PictBridge Holder Assy

 Match the positioning slit of the Grounding Plate with the tab
of the Lower Housing as shown in Figure 4-104
 Route the PictBridge cable through the groove of the Lower
Housing as shown below.

PictBridge cable Groove

Figure 4-105. Routing the PictBridge Cable

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 113

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.4.11 Paper EJ Frame Assy / Front Cover / CDR Tray C A U T IO N When performing the following procedure, take care not to scratch
Base the Star Wheel.
1. Remove the Upper Housing Support Assy. (p.85)
2. Release the Front Cover from the two guide pins of the CDR Tray Base.
3. Release the Front Cover from the groove of the Lower Housing, and remove the
7. Remove the two guide pins on the CDR Tray Base from the Left and Right CDR
Front Cover.
Release Lever Sub Assy.
4. Remove the Left Frame Support Plate. (refer to 4.4.5 Carriage Shaft / Carriage
Unit Step5 (p100), Step6(p101).) 8. Pull the Star Wheel Roller toward you, and remove the CDR Tray Base and the
Paper EJ Frame Assy from the Printer Mechanism keeping the Assy from coming
5. Return the rotation position of the Right PG Cam. in contact with the Right CDR Release Lever Sub Assy and the tab on the Right
6. Remove the four C.B.S. M3 x 6 screws and two C.B.P. M3 x 8 screws that secure CDR Cover.
the Paper EJ Frame Assy.

Star Wheel
Tabs
Roller

1 4

3
2

Tabs

Guide pins Left CDR Release Right CDR Right CDR Release
Lever Sub Assy Guide Cover Lever Sub Assy
2) C.B.S. M3x6
(8±1 kgf.cm) pins

4) C.B.P. M3x8
(8±1 kgf.cm)

CDR Tray Base Front Cover Point of contact

Figure 4-106. Screws that Secure the Paper EJ Frame Assy

Figure 4-107. Removing the Paper EJ Frame Assy

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 114

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

9. Remove the C.B.S. M3 x 6 screw that secures the Right CDR Tray Base Support,
 Hook both rear ends of the Paper EJ Frame Assy onto the tabs
and remove the Right CDR Tray Base Support.
on the Main Frame.
 Align the bearing of the CDR Release Level Sub Assy with the
Paper EJ Release Shaft.
Right CDR Tray Base Support

2) C.B.S. M3x6 Shaft and Shaft and

Bushing Tabs Bushing
Figure 4-108. Remove the CDR Tray Base Support
Figure 4-110. Reinstalling the Paper EJ Frame Assy

10. Remove the E Ring that secures the CDR Tray Base and remove the CDR Tray  Attach the LABEL,CAUTION,CDR;B (parts code:1470311) at
Base in the direction of the arrow. the position as shown below.

34mm
E Ring
2mm

LABEL,CAUTION,CDR;B

Figure 4-111. Attaching Position of the CDR Caution Label

CDR Tray Base
 Match the tabs with the five positioning holes.
Figure 4-109. Remove the CDR Tray Base See Figure 4-106.
 Tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 4-107

A D J U S T M E N T After replacing or removing the Paper EJ Frame Assy, always make

R E Q U IR E D
the required adjustments referring to the following.
• “Chapter 5 Adjustment (p.139)”

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 115

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.4.12 CDR Release Lever Sub Assy 4. To prevent parts from dropping, refit the shaft on the Right CDR Release Base into
the CDR Release Lever.
1. Remove the Paper EJ Frame Assy / Front Cover / CDR Tray Base. (p.114)
5. Press the guide pin that secures the Right CDR Release Lever Sub Assy with
2. Remove the Shaft on the Right CDR Release Base from the bushing on the CDR tweezers, and remove it upwards from the Main Frame.
Release Lever.

Shaft and Bushing Tab

Guide pin
Right CDR Release Base CDR Release Lever

Figure 4-112. Removing the Right CDR Release Lever Sub Assy (1)

3. Remove the C.B.S. M3 x 6 screw that secures the Right CDR Release Lever Sub
Assy.
Figure 4-114. Removing the Right CDR Release Lever Sub Assy (3)

2) C.B.S. M3x6
(6±1 kgf.cm)

Figure 4-113. Removing the Right CDR Release Lever Sub Assy (2)

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 116

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

6. Remove the Spur Gear 68 from the Paper EJ Roller Shaft.

 Make sure that the Left CDR Release Lever Sub Assy is
correctly assembled as shown in the figure below.

Spur Gear 68

Figure 4-115. Removing the Spur Gear 68

7. Remove the C.B.P. M3 x 6 screw that secures the Left CDR Release Lever Sub Figure 4-117. Reinstalling the Left CDR Release Lever Sub Assy (1)
Assy.
8. Press the small tab of the Left CDR Release Lever Sub Assy with a flathead  Align the Shaft and Bushing.
screwdriver, and remove the Left CDR Release Lever Sub Assy upward from the
Main Frame.

Tabs
Figure 4-118. Reinstalling the Left CDR Release Lever Sub Assy (2)

Small tab 9) C.B.P. M3x6  Align the two tabs on the Left CDR Release Lever Sub Assy with
(6±1 kgf.cm) the positioning holes on the Main Frame. (See Figure 4-116.)
Figure 4-116. Removing the Left CDR Release Lever Sub Assy

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 117

 EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.4.13 Ink System Unit 5. Remove the two C.B.S. M3 x 4 screws that secure the Ink System Guide Plate, and
remove it.
1. Remove the Right CDR Release Lever Sub Assy. (Refer to 4.4.12 CDR Release
Lever Sub Assy (p.116))
2. Release the Carriage Lock, and move the Carriage Unit to the center. (Refer to 4.1.6
Locking/Unlocking the Carriage and Opening/Closing the CDR Tray Base (p.75))
2
3. Remove the C.B.S. M3 x 8 screw that secures the Earth cable to remove the Earth
cables, and untie the Earth cable from the Relay connector cable.
4. Disconnect the Pump Motor connector from the Relay connector.

5) C.B.S. M3x8
(8±1 kgf.cm)
Ink System Guide
Plate

1 Acetate Tape
10) C.B.S. M3x10
(8±1 kgf.cm)

Figure 4-120. Removing the Ink System Guide Plate

 Align the notch on the Ink System Guide Plate with the notch
on the Main Frame.
 Referring to Figure 4-120 and Figure 4-121, attach the acetate
tape.
Earth cable Relay connector cable Relay connector
Figure 4-119. Disconnecting the Pump Motor Connector

 Be sure to screw the two Earth cables together.

 Referring to Figure 4-119, correctly route the Relay connector
cable.

Figure 4-121. Reinstalling the Ink System Guide Plate

 Tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 4-120

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 118

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

6. Remove the two C.B.S. M3 x 6 screws that secure the Ink System Unit. 7. Remove the two C.B.S. M3 x 6 screws that secure the Right Support Frame, and
remove the Right Support Frame from the Main Frame.
Front Rear

2
1

Right Support
Upper
Frame
surface
2) C.B.S. M3x6
(8±1 kgf.cm)
2) C.B.S. M3x6
Figure 4-122. Screws that Secure the Ink System Unit (8±1 kgf.cm)
1 2) C.B.S. M3x6
(8±1 kgf.cm)

Figure 4-123. Removing the Right Support Frame

Tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 4-122

 Align the positioning holes on the Right Support Frame with

the guide pins on the Main Frame.

Positioning holes and

Guide pins
Figure 4-124. Installing the Right Support Frame

 Tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 4-123

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 119

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

8. Remove the Ink System Unit downwards from the Main Frame keeping the Unit
 Place the Paper EJ Lock Release Cam on the rear side of the
from coming in contact with the Paper EJ Transmission Lock Lever.
Paper EJ Transmission Lock Lever.

Paper EJ Lock Release Cam

Ink System Unit

Paper EJ
Transmission
Lock Lever

Paper
Paper EJ EJ Transmission
Transmission Lock Lever

Figure 4-127. Reinstalling the Ink System Unit (1)

Figure 4-125. Removing the Ink System Unit

 Align the positioning hole on the Main Frame with the guide
pin on the Ink System Unit.
 When the Ink System Unit is removed from the Printer
Mechanism, the Paper EJ Lock Release Cam may drop off. In
such case, correctly install it referring to the figure below.

Positioning hole Guide pin

Figure 4-128. Reinstalling the Ink System Unit (2)

Paper EJ Lock Release Cam
Figure 4-126. Installing the Paper EJ Lock Release Cam

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 120

 EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.4.14 Front Paper Guide / Paper EJ Roller / 4. Remove the Spacer from the EJ Roller Shaft.
Front Paper Guide Pad Tray 5. Remove the guide pins on Left Bushing 8 from the Main Frame using tweezers,
and turn Left Bushing 8 toward you to align with the notches on the Main Frame.
1. Remove the Paper EJ Frame Assy / Front Cover / CDR Tray Base. (p.114)
2. Release the Carriage Lock, and move the Carriage Unit to the center. (Refer to 4.1.6
Locking/Unlocking the Carriage and Opening/Closing the CDR Tray Base (p.75))
3. Remove the EJ Grounding Spring from the Main Frame with tweezers. Notch

Guide
pin
EJ Grounding Spacer
Spring
Left Bushing 8
Groove

Figure 4-131. Removing the Spacer and Rotating the Left Bushing 8

Insert the spacer into the groove on the Front Paper EJ Roller.
Figure 4-129. Removing the EJ Grounding Spring

Referring to Figure 4-130, correctly install the EJ Grounding

Spring. 6. Slide the Front Paper EJ Roller to the left, and remove the Left Bushing 8 from the
Main Frame.

Front Paper EJ Roller

Figure 4-130. Reinstalling the EJ Grounding Spring

Figure 4-132. Removing the Left Bushing 8

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 121

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

7. Return the Carriage Unit to its home position. 10. Pull out the Shaft of the Left Front Frame from the bushing of the Front Paper
Guide and remove the Left Front Frame.
8. Remove the C.B.S. M3 x 6 screw that secure the Left Front Frame.
9. Release the tab that secures the Front Paper Guide from the Main Frame and slide Shaft
the Front Paper Guide to the left, and turn it until the front side faces up to remove
the Front Paper Guide together with the Paper EJ Roller.

2) C.B.S. M3x6 Bushing

Left Front
Frame

Tab

Left Front Frame

Figure 4-134. Removing the Front Paper Guide/Paper EJ Rollers (2)

Paper EJ Rollers (Front side) Front Paper Guide

Paper EJ Rollers (Back side) 11. Remove the Front Paper Guide Pad Tray in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 4-133. Removing the Front Paper Guide and Paper EJ Rollers
Front Paper Guide

Tabs and holes

Front Paper Guide Pad Tray

Figure 4-135. Removing the Front Paper Guide Pad Tray

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 122

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT PAPER GUIDE PAD TRAY  Align the bushing of the Front Paper Guide with the PF Roller
Shaft.
1. Remove the Front Paper Guide Pad Tray in the direction of the arrow. (p.122)
2. Remove the three Waste Ink Pads from the Front Paper Guide Pad Tray. Shaft and bushing

Waste Ink Pad

Figure 4-137. The PF Roller Shaft and the bushing of the Front
Paper Guide

 Align the positioning holes on the Main Frame with the guide
Front Paper Guide Pad Tray pins on the Front Paper Guide.

Guide pins
Figure 4-136. Removing the Waste Ink Pad

Engage the two tabs of the Front Paper Guide Pad Tray with the
holes of the Front Paper Guide as shown in Figure 4-135.

Figure 4-138. Reinstalling the Front Paper Guide

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 123

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

After installing the Front Paper Guide, lift the Printer Mechanism 4.4.15 PF Roller Shaft
to check the following points. 1. Remove the PF Encoder. (p.134)
1. Make sure that the tabs on the Paper Guide Pad are not cut
midway. 2. Remove the Upper Paper Guide Assys. (p.129)
2. Make sure that all the tabs are facing down (toward the Waste 3. Loosen the two C.C. M3 x 4 screws that secure the PF Motor, and remove the PF
Ink Pads) without any folds. Drive Belt from the PF Motor Pinion Gear.
3. Make sure that the tab foldbacks are protruding completely 4. Remove the spacer that secures Spur Gear 31.5, and remove Spur Gear 31.5 from
from the Front Paper Guide. the Printer Mechanism.

11) C.C. M3x4

(4±0.5 kgf.cm)

Tabs
Tabs Spacer

Figure 4-139. Checking the Front Paper Guide Pad

A D J U S T M E N T After replacing the following parts, be sure to apply G-45 grease to the
R E Q U IR E D
area specified for each part.
 EJ Grounding Spring: See Figure 6-10 on page 168.
PF Motor Pinion Gear
 Front Paper Guide and Paper EJ Roller: See Figure 6-11 on
PF Drive Belt Spur Gear 31.5
page 168.
Figure 4-140. Removing the PF Drive Belt and Spur Gear 31.5
A D J U S T M E N T After replacing or removing the Front Paper Guide and Paper EJ
R E Q U IR E D
Roller, always make the required adjustments referring to the
following.
• “Chapter 5 Adjustment (p.139)”

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 124

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

5. Remove the PG Grounding Spring from the notch on the Main Frame, and remove 7. Remove the guide pin of Left Bushing 8 from the Main Frame using tweezers, and
the PF Grounding Spring from the groove on the PF Roller Shaft. rotate the Bushing upwards to align with the notch on the Main Frame.

Rear Notch

Notch
PF Grounding Spring

Guide pin
Left Bushing 8

PF Roller Shaft Groove

Figure 4-143. Rotating the Left Bushing 8
Figure 4-141. Removing the PF Grounding Spring

6. Make sure that the Left Parallelism Adjust Bushing is not protruding from the C A U T IO N When performing the following procedure, take care not to lose the
notch on the Main Frame. If it is protruding, loosen the C.B.S. (P4) M3 x 8 screw E-ring.
that secures the Left Parallelism Adjust Bushing, and slide it to prevent the Left
Parallelism Adjust Bushing from becoming hooked on the notch.

Left Parallelism 8. Remove the E-ring from the PF Roller Shaft with a flathead screwdriver, and slide
Adjust Bushing Left Bushing 8 to the inside of the Printer Mechanism.
6) C.B.S. (P4) M3x8
(5±1 kgf.cm)
E-Ring

Notch
PF Roller Shaft

Figure 4-142. Rotating the Left Parallelism Adjust Bushing

Figure 4-144. Removing the Left Bushing 8

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 125

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

C A U T IO N When performing the following procedure, pay attention to the C A U T IO N Be careful not to move Compression Spring 4 and the Leaf Spring
following points. on the left side of the PF Roller Shaft to the coated section on the
 Prevent the coated surface of the PF Roller Shaft from being Shaft after removing the PF Roller Shaft.
scratched.
 Do not touch the coated surface of the PF Roller Shaft with Compression Spring 4
bare hands.
Leaf Spring
Coating Part

Figure 4-147. Handling the PF Roller Shaft

Figure 4-145. Handling the PF Roller Shaft

A D J U S T M E N T After replacing the PF Roller Shaft, always make the required
R E Q U IR E D
adjustments referring to the following.
9. Remove the PF Roller Shaft from the Bushings on the Rear Paper Guide and the
• “Chapter 5 Adjustment (p.139)”
Center Support, slide the PF Roller Shaft to the left to remove it from Right
Bushing 8, and remove the PF Roller Shaft along the notch of the Main Frame.

Rear Paper Guide

Notch

Bushings Center Support

Right Bushing 8

Figure 4-146. Removing the PF Roller Shaft

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 126

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.4.16 Release Holder Assy  Align the three upper tabs on the Release Holder Assy with the
1. Remove the APG Assy. (p.91) positioning holes on the Main Frame. See Figure 4-148.
 Fit the FLAG Release Shaft by the bushings on the Release
2. Release the PE Sensor connector cable from the five tabs on the Release Holder Holder Assy.
Assy.
3. Remove the three C.B.S. M3 x 6 screws that secure the Release Holder Assy. Bushings
4. Remove the three lower tabs of the Release Holder Assy from the Main Frame
with a flathead screwdriver, and remove the Release Holder Assy upwards.

Rear side Tabs PE Sensor connector cable

FLAG Release Shaft

3 2 1
Figure 4-149. Reinstalling the Release Holder Assy
Release Holder Assy
2) C.B.S. M3x6
(8±1 kgf.cm)  Tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 4-148
Front side
Upper Tabs

Lower Tabs

Figure 4-148. Removing the Release Holder Assy

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 127

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.4.17 FLAG Release Assy 4. Release the three tabs on the Driven Release Holder from the Main Frame, and
remove the FLAG Release Assy.
1. Remove the APG Assy. (p.91).
2. Remove the Release Holder Assy. (p.127) Front Front

3. Remove the guide pin on the Driven Release Holder from the Main Frame using
tweezers, and slide the Driven Release Holder to the left as viewed from the front
of the Printer Mechanism.
Tabs

C A U T IO N In the following procedure, Parallel Pin 1.5 may drop off when the
Driven Release Holder is slid. Be careful not to lose it.

Tab
Guide pin

Rear Driven Release Holder

Tabs
Parallel Pin 1.5

Figure 4-150. Parallel Pin 1.5

Guide pin

FLAG Release Assy

Figure 4-151. Removing the FLAG Release Assy

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 128

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Attach the five Perforated Sheets and the LD Cover Sheet to the six 4.4.18 Upper Paper Guide Assys
locations shown in the figure below to prevent ink from sticking to 1. FLAG Release Assy (p.128)
the LD Rollers.
 Remove the five Paper Guide Torsion Springs from the tabs, 2. Remove the PE Sensor Holder. (p.137)
insert the notches of the Perforated Sheets into the tabs to 3. Pass a sheet of A3 size paper into the gap between the Upper Paper Guide Assy
attach them to the Main Frame, and then hook the Paper Guide and the Rear Paper Guide.
Torsion Springs onto the tabs again.
 Insert the LD Cover Sheet in between the frame so that the tabs
on the upper side of the LD Cover Sheet are visible from the
notches on the Main Frame, and attach the LD Cover Sheet.

LD Cover Sheet Perforated Sheets

A3-size paper Rear Paper Guide

Tab Tab Paper Guide Torsion Spring
Figure 4-153. Setting the Paper

Figure 4-152. Attaching the Perforated Sheets and the LD Cover

Sheet

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 129

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4. Remove the six Upper Paper Guide Torsion Springs from the tabs on the Main
Make sure that the leading end of the Upper Paper Guide Torsion
Frame, and pull out the Upper Paper Guide Torsion Springs from the six Upper
Spring can be seen through the hole of the Upper Paper Guide Assy.
Paper Guide Assys.
Upper Paper Guide
Upper Paper Guide Torsion Sprig
Tab Torsion Sprig

Shaft Shaft

Hole
Figure 4-155. Reinstalling the Upper Paper Guide Torsion Spring

Tabs 5. Lift the six Upper Paper Guide Assys from the Main Frame to release the shaft
referring to Figure 4-155, and remove the Upper Paper Guide Assys to the rear.

Upper Paper Guide Assys

Figure 4-154. Removing the Upper Paper Guide Torsion Spring Figure 4-156. Removing the Upper Paper Guide Assy

A D J U S T M E N T After replacing the following part, be sure to apply G-26 grease to the
R E Q U IR E D
specified area.
 Upper Paper Guide Assy: See Figure 6-9 on page 168.

Disassembly And Assembly Disassembling the Printer Mechanism 130

 EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.5 Removing the Motors 5. Remove the two C.B.S. M3 x 4 screws that secure the CR Motor, and remove the
CR Motor from the Main Frame.

4.5.1 CR Motor
10) C.B.S. M3x10
1. Remove the Upper Housing / Printer Cover. (p.83) (4±0.5 kgf.cm)

2. Release the Carriage Lock, and move the Carriage Unit to the center. (Refer to 4.1.6
Locking/Unlocking the Carriage and Opening/Closing the CDR Tray Base (p.75))
3. Disconnect the CR Motor connector cable from the Relay connector.

CR Motor 2 1

Figure 4-159. Removing the CR Motor

CR Motor connector  Make the Lot No. printed surface on the CR Motor face the
cable
direction shown in the figure below.

Relay connector Lot No. Printed Surface

Figure 4-157. Removing the CR Motor Connector Cable

4. Press the Driven Pulley toward the center to loosen the CR Drive Belt, and remove
the CR Drive Belt from the CR Motor Pinion Gear.

CR Drive Belt
CR Motor Pinion Gear
Figure 4-160. Reinstalling the CR Motor

 Tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 4-159

A D J U S T M E N T After replacing the CR Motor, always make the required adjustments

Driven Pulley R E Q U IR E D
referring to the following.
• “Chapter 5 Adjustment (p.139)”
Figure 4-158. Removing the CR Motor

Disassembly And Assembly Removing the Motors 131

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.5.2 PF Motor A D J U S T M E N T  Make the slit on the PF Motor face the direction shown in the
R E Q U IR E D
1. Remove the Printer Mechanism. (Refer to 4.4.4 Lower Housing / Printer figure below.
Mechanism (p.98))
2. Disconnect the PF Motor connector cable from connector CN116 (black) on the
Main Board, and remove it from the Clamp on the Main Frame.
3. Remove the two C.C. M3 x 4 screws that secure the PF Motor.
4. Remove the PF Drive Belt from the PF Motor Pinion Gear, and remove the PF
Motor from the Printer Mechanism.
Slit

Figure 4-162. Reinstalling the PF Motor

PF Motor connector cable

 Tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 4-161

Clamp
A D J U S T M E N T After replacing or removing the PF Motor, always make the required
PF Drive Belt R E Q U IR E D
adjustments referring to the following.
• “Chapter 5 Adjustment (p.139)”

1
CN116
PF Motor 11) C.C. M3x4 Pinion Gear
(4±0.5 kgf.cm)

Figure 4-161. Removing the PF Motor

Disassembly And Assembly Removing the Motors 132

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.5.3 ASF Motor

1. Remove the ASF Assy. (p.108)
2. Release the ASF Motor cable from the cable hook and disconnect the relay
connector.
3. Remove the two C.B.P. M3 x 8 screws that secure the ASF Motor and remove the
ASF Motor.

Cable Hook

ASF Motor

4) C.B.P. M3x8
Grounding Wire

Figure 4-163. Removing the ASF Motor

Secure the grounding wire and the ASF Motor together with the
screw in the middle of the printer.

Disassembly And Assembly Removing the Motors 133

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.6 Removing the Sensors 4.6.2 PF Encoder

1. Remove the Upper Housing / Printer Cover. (p.83)
4.6.1 CR Encoder 2. Disconnect the FFC from the PF Encoder Sensor Board.
1. Remove the Carriage Shaft / Carriage Unit. (p.100) 3. Remove the C.B.S. M3 x 8 screw that secures the PF Encoder Sensor Holder.
2. Remove the two C.B.P. M2.6 x 5 screws that secure the CR Encoder Sensor
Board. FFC PF Encoder Sensor Holder

3. Disconnect the FFC of the PW Sensor and Ink Mark Sensor from the connector on
the CR Encoder Sensor Board, and remove the CR Encoder Sensor Board.
5) C.B.S. M3x8
Connector (6±1 kgf.cm)

13) C.B.P. M2.6x5

(3±0.5 kgf.cm)

FFC

Figure 4-165. Removing the FFC and the Screw that Secures
the PF Encoder Sensor Holder
CR Encoder
Sensor Board
Connector

Figure 4-164. Removing the CR Encoder Sensor Board

Disassembly And Assembly Removing the Sensors 134

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4. While pressing the guide pin on the PF Encoder Sensor Holder using tweezers, 4.6.3 Ink Mark Sensor / PW sensor
slide the holder upwards to release the three tabs, and remove the PF Encoder
Sensor Holder. 1. Remove the Carriage Shaft / Carriage Unit. (p.100)
2. Remove the C.P.B. (P1) M1.7 x 5 screw that secures the PW Sensor Holder, and
remove the PW Sensor Holder from the Carriage Unit.

Carriage Unit Bottom Side

PW Sensor Holder
Guide pin

Tabs

12) C.P.B. (P1) M1.7x5

Figure 4-166. Removing the PF Encoder Sensor Holder (0.8±0.2 kgf.cm)
Figure 4-168. Removing the PW Sensor Holder

Make sure that the PF Scale is in the slit on the PF Encoder Sensor.
3. Disconnect the FFC from the Ink Mark Sensor and the PW Sensor connector, and
remove the Ink Mark Sensor and PW Sensor.

Slit
PW sensor
PF Scale

Connector

PF Encoder Sensor

Ink Mark Sensor

Figure 4-167. Reinstalling the PF Encoder Sensor Holder Figure 4-169. Removing the Ink Mark Sensor and PW Sensor

Disassembly And Assembly Removing the Sensors 135

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Make sure that the FFC is routed as shown in Figure 4-169 4.6.4 CDR Sensor
1. Remove the Paper EJ Frame Assy / Front Cover / CDR Tray Base. (p.114)
2. Disengage the two hooks that secure the CDR Sensor and remove the CDR
Sensor.

A D J U S T M E N T After replacing or removing the Ink Mark Sensor and the PW Sensor,
R E Q U IR E D
always make the required adjustments referring to the following. Hooks
• “Chapter 5 Adjustment (p.139)”

CDR Sensor

Figure 4-170. Removing the CDR Sensor

Disassembly And Assembly Removing the Sensors 136

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.6.5 PE Sensor Holder Align the four tabs and guide pin on the PE Sensor Holder with the
1. Remove the APG Assy. (p.91) positioning holes on the Main Frame correctly so that there is no
gap between the PE Sensor Holder and the Main Frame.
2. Remove the PE Sensor connector cable from the five tabs on the Release Holder
Assy and the two tabs on the Head Cable Cover.
Tabs

Head Cable Cover Tabs PE Sensor connector cable

Guide
Guide pin

Tabs

Release Holder Assy.

Figure 4-173. Reinstalling the PE Sensor

Figure 4-171. Releasing the Cables

3. Release the tabs that secure the PE Sensor Holder from the notch on the Main
Frame with a flathead screwdriver, and slide the PE Sensor Holder upwards and
then remove it toward you.

Front Side

Tab

PE Sensor Holder

Figure 4-172. Removing the PE Sensor Holder

Disassembly And Assembly Removing the Sensors 137

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4.6.6 Cover Open Sensor

1. Remove the Panel Unit. (p.80)
2. Remove the C.B.P. M3 x 8 screw that secures the Cover Open Sensor and remove
the Cover Open Sensor.

Cover Open Sensor

4) C.B.P. M3x8
Guide pins and
Positioning holes

Figure 4-174. Removing the Cover Open Sensor

Align the guide pins with the positioning holes shown in Figure
4-174.

Disassembly And Assembly Removing the Sensors 138

 CHAPTER

5
ADJUSTMENT
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

5.1 Adjustment Items and Overview

This chapter describes adjustments to be made after the disassembly/reassembly of this product.

5.1.1 Servicing Adjustment Item List

The items, purposes and outlines of the Adjustment Program are given in the following table.

Table 5-1. Adjustment Items

Adjustment Purpose Method Outline
PF Belt Tension This adjustment is made to reduce the load on the PF motor and See "5.2.1 PF Belt Tension Adjustment" (p.146).
Adjustment to ensure paper feed accuracy.
PF Roller Shaft Center This adjustment is made to compensate the deflection amount on See "5.2.3 PF Roller Shaft Center Support Position Adjustment" (p.151).
Support Position the PF Roller Shaft and to maintain the appropriate paper feed
Adjustment amount.
ASF Guide Roller LDs This adjustment is made to optimize the positions of the LD See "5.2.5 ASF Guide Roller LDs Position Adjustment" (p.161).
Position Adjustment Roller Shaft and Retard Roller in order to maintain the paper
feed accuracy.
PG Adjustment This adjustment is made to ensure the correct distance between See "5.2.2 PG Adjustment" (p.147).
the head surface and the Front Paper Guide, and to adjust the
parallelism between the 0 digit side and the 130 digit side to
ensure consistent print quality.
EEPROM Data Copy This adjustment is made to read out the necessary information 1. Select this function in the Adjustment Program.
from the EEPROM using the D4 function. If this copy is 2. Read out the data from the defective board.
completed successfully, all the other adjustments required after 3. After replacing the board with a new one, write the read data to the new board.
replacing the main board are no longer necessary.
Initial Setting After replacing the Main Board, information common to Main 1. Select and execute this function in the Adjustment Program.
Boards is written by market setting. 2. Write the initial settings to the EEPROM.
USB ID Input A USB ID is given to each printer to identify a specific printer 1. Select this function in the Adjustment Program and enter the serial number of the printer.
when using multiple printers of same model. 2. The correction value is saved to the specific EEPROM address of the Main Board.
Head ID Input When replacing the Print Head, this adjustment is made to 1. Enter the ID of the Head QR Code Label (Stylus Photo R1900: 29 digits, Stylus Photo R2880:
reduce head manufacturing variations, which may cause 17 digits), which is applied to the Print Head, into the program.
individual differences in print quality. 2. The ID is stored in the EEPROM of the Main Board.
Supplement: Read the QR code label from left to right on the top row and from top to bottom in
due order.)
Head angular adjustment This adjustment is made to correct the error in the Print Head 1. Select this function in the Adjustment Program and print the adjustment pattern.
mounting position (Head angle) to make the nozzle line straight 2. After checking the displacement amount of the pattern, enter the pattern number which has the
with respect to the paper feeding direction. Angular smallest amount of displacement.
displacement is also checked for.

Adjustment Adjustment Items and Overview 140

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 5-1. Adjustment Items

Adjustment Purpose Method Outline
Multi Sensor Adjustment This adjustment is made to correct a detection position error, 1. Select and execute this function in the Adjustment Program.
(Ink Mark Sensor which is caused by the displacement of the Ink Mark Sensor 2. Pattern printing and adjustment are automatically executed.
Adjustment) mounting position, on a software basis. Supplement: Be sure to confirm that there are no dots missing before executing this adjustment.
Bi-D adjustment This adjustment is made to correct the print timing in the go and 1. Select and execute this function in the Adjustment Program.
return paths in bi-directional printing. 2. Pattern printing and adjustment are automatically executed.
Supplement: Be sure to confirm that there are no dots missing before executing this adjustment.
First dot position This function adjusts the print starting position in the CR main 1. Select this function in the Adjustment Program and print the adjustment pattern.
adjustment scanning direction. 2. Select a pattern number 5mm away from each edge, and enter that number in the program.
3. The correction value is saved to the specific EEPROM address of the Main Board.
PW adjustment This adjustment is made to correct the PW Sensor mounting 1. Select this function in the Adjustment Program and print the adjustment pattern.
position on a software basis to improve a paper detection error 2. Select a pattern number 5mm away from each edge, and enter that number in the program.
caused by the variation of the mounting position. 3. The correction value is saved to the specific EEPROM address of the Main Board.
Initialize PF The deterioration amount of the PF Roller Shaft is reflected to 1. Select and execute this function in the Adjustment Program.
deterioration offset the paper feed correction amount. Every time a sheet of paper is 2. Reset the PF deterioration counter.
fed, the deterioration amount is counted on the basis of the
original counter value setting.When the PF Roller Shaft or
Printer Mechanism has been replaced during repair, the PF
deterioration counter must be reset.
Disenable PF The PF deterioration compensation counter can be reset only 1. Select and execute this function in the Adjustment Program.
deterioration offset when the PF Roller Shaft is new. To reduce the ancillary work in 2. Reset the PF deterioration counter.
servicing, enter the maximum value (value for which
deterioration compensation is not made) if the PF Roller Shaft
has not been replaced.
PF adjustment This correction is made when the actual paper feed amount 1. Select this function in the Adjustment Program and print the adjustment pattern.
differs greatly from the theoretical value due to paper slip, PF 2. Select or measure the adjustment value, and write it to the specific EEPROM address on the
roller tolerances, etc. during paper feed for printing. Main Board.
PF adjustment (Bottom This correction is made when the actual paper feed amount 1. Select this function in the Adjustment Program and print the adjustment pattern.
Margin) while printing on the bottom of paper differs greatly from the 2. Select or measure the adjustment value, and write it to the specific EEPROM address on the
theoretical value due to paper slip, exit roller tolerances, etc. Main Board.
Colorimetric calibration This adjustment is made to adjust the ink discharge amount. See "5.2.4 Colorimetric Calibration" (p.155).

Adjustment Adjustment Items and Overview 141

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 5-1. Adjustment Items

Adjustment Purpose Method Outline
CR motor heat protection This adjustment is made to measure the manufacturing 1. Select/execute this function in the Adjustment Program.
control variations of the CR Motor and PS Board to make the most of 2. After execution, the variations are automatically measured and the measurement values are
the motor capabilities for motor heat generation control. written to the EEPROM on the Main Board.
CR motor heat protection CR Dispersion Measurement can be performed only when the 1. Select/execute this function in the Adjustment Program.
control Carriage Shaft is new. To reduce the ancillary work in servicing, 2. After execution, the dispersions are automatically measured and the worst value is written to the
(Maximum value) enter the worst value (on which heat generation limit is easily EEPROM on the Main Board.
imposed) if the Carriage Shaft has not been replaced.

Table 5-2. Maintenance Functions

Function Item Purpose Method Outline
Ink charge This function is used for Print Head replacement to drain 1. Select this function in the Adjustment Program.
Shipping Liquid of the after-sales service part in the head flow 2. Transfer the factory-set command (CL execution command (Initial Ink Charge) is used as the
path and simultaneously fill ink in the head flow path to make all command) to the printer to make the printer perform Initial Ink Charge operation.
nozzles printable and stabilize the ink in the Print Head.
Head cleaning This function is used to execute cleaning 3 (CL3) when ink is 1. Select this function in the Adjustment Program.
not delivered from the Print Head properly, e.g. dot missing or 2. Execute CL3.
skewed injection.
Waste ink pad counter This function is used to read and reset the Waste Ink Counters. 1. In the Adjustment Program, select data read or reset from this function.
Before executing this function, replace the Waste Ink Pads on both the 0 digit and 130 digit side.
High Voltage Module This function is used to confirm the supply voltage from the 1. Select this function in the Adjustment Program, set the High Voltage Module to On.
inspection module falls within the specified range correctly. 2. Using the tester, measure the voltage between the frame (near 130 digit side) and the screw
securing the electrode cable to confirm the measured voltage falls within the range of 240V to
500V. (For the location of the screw securing the electrode cable, see Figure 4-62. (p98).)

Table 5-3. Additional Functions

Function Item Purpose Method Outline
Final check pattern print A4 size Use this to check if the all adjustments have been properly The all adjustment patterns are printed automatically.
US Letter size made.

EEPROM dump Use this to read out the EEPROM data for analysis. The all EEPROM data is automatically read out and stored as a file.
Printer information Manual CL counter Use this to read out information on the printer operations. The printer information is automatically read out.
check I/C exchange CL counter
Timer CL counter
Print path counter

Adjustment Adjustment Items and Overview 142

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

5.1.2 Required Adjustments

The table below lists the required adjustments depending upon the parts being repaired or replaced. Find the part(s) you removed or replaced, and check which adjustment(s) must be carried out.
m

Table 5-4. Required Adjustment List

Priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

(Ink Mark Sensor Adjustment)

First dot position adjustment
Support Position adjustment

Initial setting/USB ID Input

PF Belt tension adjustment

Disenable PF deterioration
Consumables maintenance

Initialize PF deterioration

CR motor heat protection

Head angular adjustment

Multi Sensor Adjustment

Final check pattern print

Colorimetric calibration
PF Roller Shaft Center

ASF Guide Roller LDs

EEPROM Data Copy

High Voltage Module
Adjustment

Position Adjustment

Bi-D adjustment
PG Adjustment

PW adjustment
Item

PF adjustment
Head ID input

Ink charge
inspection

counter

control
offset

offset
Part Name

Remove --- --- *1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
ASF Assy
Replace --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
CR Motor
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
Remove --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O O --- O --- --- --- O
Printhead
Replace --- --- --- O --- --- --- O --- O --- --- O O O --- O --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
Replace
--- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
Main Board (Read OK)
Replace
--- --- --- --- --- --- O O *2 --- --- O O O O O O O O O O
(Read NG)
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
PS Board
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O O
High Voltage Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
Module Replace --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
Front Paper Guide/ Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- O --- --- O
Paper Eject Roller Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- O --- --- O
Remove O O --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- O --- --- O
PF Roller Shaft
Replace O O --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- O --- --- O
Remove O O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- O
PF Motor
Replace O O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- O O

Adjustment Adjustment Items and Overview 143

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 5-4. Required Adjustment List

Priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

(Ink Mark Sensor Adjustment)

First dot position adjustment
Support Position adjustment

Initial setting/USB ID Input

PF Belt tension adjustment

Disenable PF deterioration
Consumables maintenance

Initialize PF deterioration

CR motor heat protection

Head angular adjustment

Multi Sensor Adjustment

Final check pattern print

Colorimetric calibration
PF Roller Shaft Center

ASF Guide Roller LDs

Adjustment

EEPROM Data Copy

High Voltage Module
Position Adjustment

Bi-D adjustment
Item

PG Adjustment

PW adjustment

PF adjustment
Head ID input

Ink charge
inspection

counter

control
offset

offset
Part Name

Waste Ink Pad/ Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
Front Paper Guide
Pad Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O

Remove --- --- --- *3 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
Carriage shaft
Replace --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O O --- O --- --- --- O
Remove --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
Carriage Unit
Replace --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O O --- O --- --- --- O
Paper EJ Frame Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- O --- --- O
Assy Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- O --- --- O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
Printer Mechanism
Replace O --- O O --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- O O O O O O O --- O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- O
PW Sensor
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- O --- --- --- --- O
Ink Mark Sensor
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- O --- --- --- --- O
Note : “O” indicates that the adjustment must be carried out. “---” indicates that the adjustment
C A U T IO N  When the EEPROM Data Copy cannot be made for the main is not required. If you have removed or replaced multiple parts, make sure to check the
board that needs to be replaced, the Waste Ink Tray Assy must required adjustments for the all parts. And when multiple adjustments must be carried
be replaced after replacing the main board with a new one. out, be sure to carry out them in the order given in the “Priority” row.
 After all required adjustments are completed, use the “Final Note "*1" :When only removing the ASF Assy, you do not need to perform the adjustment. In
check pattern print” function to print all adjustment patterns that case, mark the installing positions before removing them, and make sure to align
for final check. If you find a problem with the printout the markings when installing. See "4.4.6 ASF Assy" (p108).
"*2" :Replacing the Waste Ink Tray Assy is necessary when resetting waste ink pad counter.
patterns, carry out the adjustment again.
"*3" :When only removing the Carriage Shaft, you do not need to perform the adjustment.
 When using a new main board for replacing the Printer In that case, mark on the Parallelism Adjust Bushing (Left/Right) before removing
Mechanism, the Initial setting must have been made to the them, and make sure to align the markings when installing. See "4.4.5 Carriage Shaft
main board. / Carriage Unit" (p100).

Adjustment Adjustment Items and Overview 144

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

5.1.3 Required Adjustment Tools Table 5-5. List of Tools

No. Name Part Code Category Overview
The following table lists the adjustment tools required for adjustment of this product.
8 Level Block 1304994 Adjusting Used to check whether or not
Table 5-5. List of Tools jig deflection amount of the PF
No. Name Part Code Category Overview Roller Shaft is within the
Adjustment This adjustment program is specified value. Adjustment
1 Software
Program designed to display the required values are confirmed in a pair
adjustment items in the with the PF Roller Shaft
appropriate order when a Position Adjustment Jig.
–
replacement part is selected, and 9 Spanner (M3) Commercially Tool Used to loosen the screw that
provides workers with the available secures the Center Support
accurate adjustment order. Bushing when performing PF
G-26 For the Parallelism Adjust Roller Shaft Center Support
2 1080614 Grease
Bushing, Lower Paper Guide, Position Adjustment.
Driven Release Shaft, etc. 10 Tester Commercially Measuring Used to confirm the output
G-45 For the PF Roller, Front Paper available tool voltage from the High Voltage
3 1033657 Grease
Guide, Rear Paper Guide and Module falls within the
etc. specified range.

G-71 For the Carriage Unit and Note : For tools required for the Colorimetric Calibration, see P155.
4 1304682 Grease
Carriage Shaft.
PG Adjustment A gauge exclusively used to C A U T IO N Bring back the following brought and used items, then dispose of
5 1276333 Gauge
Gauge make PG Adjustment. Check them based on the local regulation in your country, please.
the correction value by  Ink cartridges
energizing it in the same way as  Cleaning cartridges
for Stylus Photo R1800.  Draining cartridges
6 PF Tension 1294120 Measuring Used to check whether or not
Measuring Tool tool the tension of the PF Drive Belt Especially in case of ink cartridges in Europe, please refer to the
is within the specified value. If
following web site to confirm the regulation in detail.
load is greater than the specified
value, the PF Motor may ECO Info: http://www.epson.eu/weee (available from July 2015)
generate heat, burning off the
coil. Reversely, if load is less
than the specified value, the
paper feed position may shift.
7 PF Roller Shaft 1304993 Adjusting Used to check whether or not
Position jig the deflection amount of the PF
Adjustment Jig Roller Shaft is within the
specified value. Adjustment
values are confirmed in a pair
with the level block.

Adjustment Adjustment Items and Overview 145

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

5.2 Adjustment 5.2.1.1 PF Belt Tension Adjustment Method

This section explains the adjustments that do not use the Adjustment Program. C A U T IO N Proper measurement may be interrupted by sounds picked up from
around. Make measurement in silent environment.
5.2.1 PF Belt Tension Adjustment
When either of the following parts has been removed or replaced, this adjustment must
be performed to reduce load on the PF Motor and to secure paper feed accuracy.
 PF Motor 1. Secure the PF Motor to the Printer Mechanism, and install the Drive Belt on the
Gear of the PF Scale and the Pinion Gear of the PF Motor.
 PF Roller Shaft
2. Press the [POWER] button. The LCD of the Measuring Tool displays No. 0 and
The PF Tension Measuring Tool is used for this adjustment. No. 1.
3. From among No. 0 to No. 9, select the channel you want to store its setting by
pressing the [SELECT] button. The initial value may be selected as the channel.)
4. Press the [WEIGHT] button. The initial value will be displayed. Type the ten-key
pad so that “1.2g/m” is displayed.
5. Press the [WIDTH] button. The initial value will be displayed. Enter “5.0 mm”
with the ten-keypad.
6. Press the [SPAN] button. The initial value will be displayed. Enter “48mm” with
the ten-keypad.
7. Bring the Microphone as close as possible to the center of the Timing Belt.

Microphone of Measuring Tool

Figure 5-1. PF Tension Measuring Tool

Timing Belt

Figure 5-2. Microphone Position

Adjustment Adjustment 146

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

As the Drive Belt is flipped with the tip of tweezers in the following 5.2.2 PG Adjustment
C A U T IO N
steps, carefully choose the flipping position so that the Belt will not
make contact with the Microphone by reaction of flipping. C H E C K  Some pictures used in this section are Stylus Photo R1800. The
P O IN T adjustment method for Stylus Photo R1900/Stylus Photo R2880
is the same as the one for Stylus Photo R1800.
 To change the PG position, turn the cam each on the left and
8. Press the [MEASURE] button. (“----” is displayed on the LCD screen.) right side of the carriage shaft simultaneously.

9. Put the tip of the tweezers on the Drive Belt, and flip it downward in that position.
The “----” displayed on the LCD will become wave pattern during the When any of the following parts has been removed or replaced, this adjustment must
measurement. When it has finished, the measurement result will be displayed by be performed to secure the specified clearance between the print surface of the Print
“N” (Newton) after the beep. This jig can pick up and measure sounds accurately, Head and paper.
regardless of the flipping force.  Print Head
10. Repeating 8 and 9, delicately shift the variable part of the PF Motor mounting  Carriage Unit
position to adjust the tension until the tension falls within the allowable standard  Carriage Shaft
value.  Parallelism Adjust Bushing (Including the case when just moved it)

A D J U S T M E N T Standard Value: 10.5 ± 2N (8.5 ~ 12.5N) In this adjustment, use the same Adjustment Gauge on the left and right sides.
R E Q U IR E D

Adjustment Gauge Continuity

Plate (Top face) Measuring Point

C A U T IO N  Even if the Timing Belt is flipped, the LCD screen may not
change at all. In this case, flip the Timing Belt again after a few
seconds have passed.
 If measurement results differ greatly from each other, acoustic
sounds may not be picked up properly in any of the Figure 5-3. Adjustment Gauge
measurements. Therefore, flip the Timing Belt again with the
tweezers, and record the value at which two measurement
results are approximate. Displaying errors in the range 1/100 to C A U T IO N  Do not touch the Adjustment Gauge Plate surface with bare
5/100, the Measuring Tool has high reliability. hands.
 If the Adjustment Gauge Plate surface is stained by ink or, etc.
wipe it with a soft cloth.

Adjustment Adjustment 147

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

5.2.2.1 PG Adjustment Method 3. Load unused Ink Cartridges of all colors into the Carriage Unit.
4. Loosen the screw that secures the Parallelism Adjust Bushing.
C A U T IO N  Before starting PG adjustment, completely wipe drops of ink
around the Print Head. Remaining drops of ink will stick to the 5. Turn the Parallelism Adjust Bushing upward to match the frame edge and the
continuity measurement portion of the Adjustment Gauge, and bottom of the Parallelism Adjust Bushing gear.
generate continuity before the continuity measurement portion
makes contact with the metal frame around the Print Head, C A U T IO N When the Parallelism Adjust Bushing is turned upwards, the frame
interrupting accurate PG Adjustment. rises up and PG narrows. Make sure that the frame does not come
 As the ink in the Print Head may stick fast and damage the into contact with the Print Head when performing the following
Print Head during PG Adjustment, make the continuity time procedure.
detected with a tester as short as possible. (Maximum 3
minutes)

1. Install the printer on a level base. Parallelism Adjust Positioning Parallelism Adjust
Bushing Point Bushing

C A U T IO N Place the printer on a level, warp-free table. Normal PG

Adjustment cannot be performed on a warped table.

2. Connect the Tester to the printer frame and Adjustment Gauge. Screw

Positioning Point Screw

Frame

Tester

Adjustment Gauge
Figure 5-4. Connecting the Tester
Figure 5-5. Setting the Parallelism Adjust Bushing

Adjustment Adjustment 148

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

6. With its conductor connection portion up, set the Adjustment Gauge in the 8. To set the PG position to the “--” position, turn the PG Cam on the right end of the
specified position (on the left side of the Front Paper Guide). Carriage Shaft clockwise so that the point marked “--” faces down.
 Setting Position
Rear direction: Match the rear end of the Gauge with the Driven Roller Shaft
of the Upper Paper Guide. PG Cam
Left direction: Release the left end of the Gauge from the Tab on the Front
Paper Guide in Figure 5-6.

Conductor Connection Point

Figure 5-8. Markings of the PG Cam

Tab Setting Position

A D J U S T M E N T  PG Standard Value
Figure 5-6. Setting the Adjustment Gauge R E Q U IR E D
•PG – – (Minus Minus) :1.05mm~1.25mm
7. Move the Carriage Unit onto the Adjustment Gauge. • PG – (Minus) :1.2mm~1.4mm
 Moving position
 Adjustment Resolution :0.06mm
Match the left end of the Gauge with the left end of the Carriage Unit.

Setting Position

Figure 5-7. Moving the Carriage Unit

Adjustment Adjustment 149

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

9. Lower the Gear of the Parallelism Adjust Bushing on the left side of the frame 11. With its conductor connection portion up, set the Adjustment Gauge in the
stepwise, and confirm continuity. When continuity is confirmed, define the specified position (on the right side of the Front Paper Guide).
position where the Gear was raised one step up from the continuity position  Setting Position
(where continuity is lost) as the left side PG position. Move the Parallelism Adjust Rear direction: Match the rear end of the Gauge with the Driven Roller Shaft
Bushing at least twice to confirm that the continuity position and the non- of the Upper Paper Guide.
continuity position are the same. Right direction: Release the right end of the Gauge from the Tab on the Front
Paper Guide in Figure 5-10.
C H E C K The following figure shows the states of the Adjust Parallel Bushing
P O IN T of the left side of the frame and the PG. This also applies to the
Adjust Parallel Bushing on the right side of the frame.)

Wider PG
Parallelism
Adjust Bushing

Narrower PG
Setting Position Conductor Tab
Connection Point

Figure 5-9. Relationship between Parallelism Adjust Bushing Figure 5-10. Setting the Adjustment Gauge
and PG

10. To set the PG position to “0” or more, turn the PG Cams on right ends of the
Carriage Shaft CCW so that the point marked “0” (or “+” or “++”) faces down.

Adjustment Adjustment 150

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

12. Move the Carriage Unit onto the Adjustment Gauge. 5.2.3 PF Roller Shaft Center Support Position
 Moving position Adjustment
Match the right end of the Gauge with the right end of the Carriage Unit.
This adjustment must be performed to compensate the deflection amount on the PF
Roller Shaft and to maintain an appropriate paper feed amount when the following
parts are removed and replaced.
 PF Motor
 PF Roller Shaft
The PF Roller Shaft Position Adjustment Jig and Level block are used for this
adjustment.

C H E C K  A substitute level block can be used if its surface accuracy is

P O IN T within 50μ.
 Use a Spanner (M3) to loosen the screw that secures the Center
Support Bushing.
Setting Position

Figure 5-11. Moving the Carriage Unit

PF Roller Shaft Center Support
13. Return the PG position to “--”. Position Adjustment Jig

14. As in step 9, move the Parallelism Adjust Bushing on the right side of the frame to
set the right side PG position.
15. Set the PG position to 0 or more.
16. Set the Adjustment Gauge on the left side of the Front Paper Guide.
17. Move the Carriage Unit onto the left side Adjustment Gauge.
18. Return the PG position to “--”.
19. Check continuity again at the PG position on the left side. If the PG position is not Level Block
out of position, tighten the Parallelism Adjust Bushing with the screws to end the
adjustment. If it is out of position, repeat the adjustment procedure from step 9.

Figure 5-12. PF Roller Shaft Center Support Position Adjustment Jig

and Level Block

Adjustment Adjustment 151

 EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

5.2.3.1 How to Adjust the PF Roller Shaft Center 4. Tilt the Printer Mechanism at about 45 degrees, and loosen the screws that secure
Support Position the Center Support Bushing Cam and the Center Support Bush.
1. Before performing this adjustment, remove the following parts:
 Lower Housing (Refer to 4.4.4 Lower Housing / Printer Mechanism (p98)) Bottom of Rear Center
 ASF Assy (Refer to 4.4.6 ASF Assy (p108))
 Board Assy (Refer to 4.3.1 Board Assy (Main Board/Power Supply Board)
(p86) )
 Carriage Unit (Refer to 4.4.5 Carriage Shaft / Carriage Unit (p100))
2. Install the printer on a level base.

C A U T IO N Place the printer on a level, warp-free table. This adjustment

cannot be performed correctly if it is performed on a warped table.

3. Set the PF Roller Shaft Position Adjustment Jig in place on the Level block, and perform
zero adjustment.
 Long hand position: Turn the dial to adjust the “0” position on the scale to the
long hand position with the jig set in place on the Level
block.
 Short hand position: Check it.
Center Support
Bushing Cam

0 position

Figure 5-14. Center Support Bushing Cam and the Screw

Figure 5-13. Setting the PF Roller Shaft Position Adjustment Jig (1)

Adjustment Adjustment 152

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

6. Turn the Center Support Bushing Cam so that the long hand position is +30μ from
C A U T IO N Check for any dirt on the PF Roller Shaft when performing the the “0” adjustment position.
following procedure.
A D J U S T M E N T  Standard Value: 30 ± 50m
R E Q U IR E D
 Adjustment Resolution: 50μ

5. Set the jig in place on the PF Roller Shaft as shown in the figure below.
 Left side: Inside of PF Roller left end (E-ring)
 Right side: Clearance between PF Roller right end (Right Bushing 8) and left C A U T IO N  +30μ must be set to compensate for the thickness of the coating
end of Upper Paper Guide on the PF Roller Shaft.
 Center: Clearance between the 2nd Upper Paper Guide and 3rd one from  Make sure that the position of the short hand is the same as at
the left “0” adjustment.

C H E C K The figure below shows the positional relationship between the

P O IN T Center Support Bushing Cam and the Dial Gage.

μ up

Center Support
Bushing Cam

μ down

Figure 5-16. Positional Relationship between Center Support

Bushing Cam and the Dial Gage

7. Tighten the Center Support Bushing Cam and the Center Support Bushing with the
screws.

C A U T IO N Check the adjustment value again as it deviates slightly when the

screw is tightened.

Figure 5-15. Setting the PF Roller Shaft Position Adjustment Jig (2)
The following page shows print samples when adjustment of the PF Roller Shaft Center
Support Positions are inside and outside the specified value range.

Adjustment Adjustment 153

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Unevenness

Figure 5-17. Outside the Specified Value Range Figure 5-18. Inside the Specified Value Range

Adjustment Adjustment 154

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

5.2.4 Colorimetric Calibration 5.2.4.1 Overview of the Colorimetric Calibration

This calibration is performed to compensate the ink discharge amount when the  Purpose
following parts are replaced: Measuring the color of the ink discharge amount information and registering/
 Print Head controlling this information improves calibration accuracy and ensures consistent
color quality.
 Main Board
 PS Board
C H E C K As color measurement is performed with the fully assembled
The following tools are used for this adjustment: P O IN T product, the electrical characteristics which are unique to each
 Archival Matte Paper/Enhanced Matte Paper (A4 or letter-size): Main/Power Board are also compensated in addition to the Print
1 sheet (for printing Calibration Chart) Head.
 Plain paper (A4 or letter-size): 1 sheet (for checking the nozzles)
 PC (OS: Windows XP/Me/2000/98)
The following drivers must be installed on the PC:  To reduce unit-to-unit and mode-to-mode variations in color.
• Printer Driver for the model to be adjusted
 To improve the accuracy of the Ink Counter.
• USB Driver for the Calibrator
The Color ID can improve the Ink Counter accuracy, which reduces the
 Calibrator (GretagMacbeth Eye-One with a UV filter) running cost of ink.
• Scanning ruler (supplied with the Calibrator)
• Calibration plate that contains a white reference tile
 Colorimetric Calibration Technology
(Calibrator accessory)  The Principle
 Colorimetric Calibration Tool (program) The ink discharge amount characteristic of a printer is measured by measuring
 Black paper (A4 size or larger) (A paper printed in solid black can also be color difference (L*a*b*) of a printed chart with a calibrator. Created Color
used.) ID information based on the obtained L*a*b values is stored on the printer.
When printing, the printer sends the Color ID to the printer driver to
compensate the number of ink droplets (dot generation rate) for each of nine1
different sized droplets of each color. This method allows mass-produced
printers to provide consistent print quality reducing unit-to-unit variation.
Example: Compensation of Ink Amount Ejected from a Print Head
(dot generation rate)
• When the standard printer generates ten dots.
Calibrator Scanning Ruler
If the ink discharge amount is insufficient by 10%, this is compensated by
White generating 11 dots.
Reference Calibration Plate
Tile Note 1: Three different sized droplets (small, medium, large) for each of three
waveforms (VSD1, 2, 3)
Figure 5-19. The Calibrator and the Accessories  Head ID
In the conventional color calibration with a Head ID, the print head
characteristics (weight of discharged ink) are measured and compensated. The
following shows the correlation between conventional Head ID adjustment
and Colorimetric Calibration.

Adjustment Adjustment 155

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 5-6.The Difference in Calibration Method between Head ID and  Supplement: Regarding remaining ink amount
Colorimetric Calibration. When the Ink Counter detects ink out, a certain amount (safety margin) of ink is
still remaining in the cartridge to prevent the print head from damages caused by
Conventional Head ID adjustment Colorimetric Calibration
printing without ink. This safety margin is important especially for a printer that
In the print head manufacturing By printing and measuring a color
discharges larger amount of ink.
process, ink discharge amount of each chart, a variation from the standard
The figure below illustrates the concept of this safety margin.
head is actually measured to get machine is obtained and registered as
individual characteristic information. the correction value (Color ID) to
The information is stored on the printer control the amount of ink droplets. Printer A
100% Ink discharge amount is low
as Head ID to control the print head.
Printer B
Ink discharge amount is standard

Actual ink amount

Printer C
C A U T IO N Before performing Colorimetric Calibration, the conventional Ink discharge amount is high
Head ID must be pre-registered. This is because the Head ID
Margin amount of ink
contains information to create a waveform to drive the head, which
is also required for the Colorimetric Calibration.
Remaining amount of ink when the
counter shows ink out.

C A U T IO N If you do not perform Colorimetric Calibration after performing Ink counter amount 100%
Head ID adjustment, the printer will be controlled only by the Head
ID, which affects the following. Figure 5-20. Concept of Remaining Ink Amount
 Ink Counter
The ink consumption counter table switches from the table for
Color ID to the one for Head ID. This change causes an ink out
error to occur 2 to 5 percent earlier than when using the table
for Color ID.
 Color Quality
Color quality will be at the same level as that of printers
adjusted by the conventional Head ID, and the same color
quality as mass-produced printers cannot be maintained.

Adjustment Adjustment 156

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

5.2.4.2 Adjusting Method of the Colorimetric Calibration  Install the printer driver for Stylus Photo R1900/Stylus Photo
C H E C K
P O IN T R2880 and USB driver for the calibrator to the PC in advance.
C H E C K The Color ID Calibration Chart is designed to be printed in a
 To prevent inks from settling down at the bottom, remove the
P O IN T completely non-compensated state. Therefore, there is no need to
ink cartridges, and shake them four or five times, then reinstall
delete an existing Color ID from EEPROM when printing out a
them to the printer before starting.
Calibration Chart.
1. Connect the printer and the calibrator with the PC to which the Colorimetric
The following illustrates the overall workflow. Calibration Tool for the printer is installed using USB cables. Then turn the printer
on.
START 2. Start up the Colorimetric Calibration Tool.
3. Load one sheet of A4 or letter-size plain paper, and click “Next” to print a nozzle
Connect the printer and calibrator to the PC, check pattern.
and start the Colorimetric Calibration Tool.
4. Check the printed nozzle check pattern.
 When there are broken lines or missing segments
Remove each ink cartridge, and shake it Run a head cleaning from the printer driver, then reprint a nozzle check
four or five times, then reinstall it.
pattern and check it.
 When there are no broken lines or missing segments
Printing of a nozzle check pattern Head cleaning Click “Next” to go to the Calibration Chart print screen.
NG
OK
Printing of a Calibration Chart
∗USB ID / printing date/time / nozzle check pattern

Drying of the Calibration Chart (five minutes)

Confirmation of USB ID / printing date/time

Measure the Calibration Chart.

Figure 5-22. Printing and checking a nozzle check pattern

Convert the color values (Lab) to Color ID
from color measurement data. The Colorimetric Calibration Tool
performs this process automatically. C H E C K If there are broken lines or missing segments, repeat the head
Write the Color ID to a printer.
P O IN T cleaning until they are eliminated.

END

Figure 5-21. Overall Workflow

Adjustment Adjustment 157

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

5. Load one sheet of A4 or letter-size Archival Matte Paper/Enhanced Matte paper to 6. After the Calibration Chart is printed, allow it to dry for five minutes. During this
print the Calibration Chart. time, check the nozzle check pattern on the chart. If there are broken lines or
missing segments, click [Print Calibration Chart again], and return to Step 5. If
there are no broken lines or missing segments, click [Next].

Figure 5-23. Printing a Calibration Chart

Print Time When there are broken lines or

2007-09-21 16:07 ( GMT 2007-09-21 07:07)
USBID:3030334852469D2F58 OS:Win BlackInk:Photo/Matte
2007-09-28 16:02 ( GMT 2007-09-28 07:02)
USB ID (18 alphanumeric digits) + OS + Black ink type missing segments
Printer:EPSON PX-G5300
Color measurement limit time
(7 days after the print time) Product name (R1900/R2880)
Figure 5-25. Drying the Chart

C H E C K If there are broken lines or missing segments observed in the nozzle

P O IN T check pattern for the Gross Optimizer, there’s no need to reprint
126 calibration patches
the check pattern.

7. Connect the Calibrator to the PC and click [Color Measuring]. The color
measurement procedure screen operated by the Calibrator control plug-in (DLL) is
Nozzle check pattern displayed on screen overlapping the Colorimetric Calibration Tool.

Figure 5-24. Illustration of Calibration Chart

C H E C K The recommended air temperature range for printing a Calibration

P O IN T Chart is 15°C to 28°C.

Figure 5-26. Color Measurement

Adjustment Adjustment 158

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

8. Place the Calibrator on the calibration plate, and click [Calibrate] 10. Follow the on-screen messages to measure the Chart. After the color measurement
is finished, click [OK].

Color Patch grid

2
4

Figure 5-27. Preparing the Calibrator 5

1

C A U T IO N  The white reference tile on the calibration plate should be clean. 3

Clean off any dirt with alcohol or other organic solvent. This button is
 The calibration plate and the Calibrator are used as a pair. Do enabled after color
measurement is
not use a calibration plate supplied with an another Calibrator. completed.

9. After confirming that you are within the color measurement time limit, place the Color measurement Patches in the completed rows are displayed in colors created
Calibration Chart sheet on a black paper, put the scanning ruler on the Chart sheet, “completed” rows according to the measurement result.
then click [OK].
Color measurement Rows that have not been measured are displayed in pale color.
“not completed” rows
Arrow Indicates the start position of color measuring.
2007-09-21 16:07 ( GMT 2007-09-21 07:07) Cursor Automatically moves up when color measurement of a row is
USBID:3030334852
2007-09-28 16:02 ( GMT 2007-09-28 07:02) completed.
Printer:EPSON PX
Scroll buttons Scroll the cursor up or down. (These buttons are available for
already measured rows or the row currently being measured.)
Check the
time here.
Figure 5-29. Starting the Color Measurement

Calibration Chart

Figure 5-28. Preparing the Calibration Chart

Adjustment Adjustment 159

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

12. When the following screen is displayed, click [End], and turn the printer OFF then
C A U T IO N  Be sure to start the measurement from the top side of the chart. back ON again to end the adjustment. This action reflects the color measurement
 Be sure to measure colors at each row two times. values on the printer.
 During color measurement, do not allow the Calibrator to rub
against unmeasured patches on the chart.
 Prevent the ruler and Calibrator from coming off the chart
sheet during color measurement. Doing so will cause incorrect
color measurement.
 During color measurement, measure only the patches on the
chart sheet. Do not measure other parts such as the USB ID
text string.
 When there is an error possibility in measuring color, a
warning mark ( ) appears at the patch in question. In such
case, make sure to measure the row that includes the patch
with a warning mark again. Figure 5-31. END
 If the number of scanned patches does not match the number of
patches on a single row, the cursor stops at that row, the error
mark ( ) appears on all of the patches on that row, and the
following error message is displayed:
• “Color measuring by Eye-One calibrator has failed.
Measure colors of the failed row again.”

11. Click [Next], and write the Color ID to the printer. After the writing has finished,
the Colorimetric Calibration Tool automatically checks the Color ID.

Figure 5-30. Writing of Color ID

Adjustment Adjustment 160

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

5.2.5 ASF Guide Roller LDs Position Adjustment 2. Turn Combination Gear 29.11 on the right side of the ASF Assy CCW to raise the
Hopper to the upper limit position (until the Hopper Pad contacts the LD Roller).
When installing the Guide Roller LDs, the position of the Guide Roller LDs must be
adjusted so that the positions of the LD Roller Shaft and Retard Roller are optimized in
order to maintain the paper feed accuracy.

5.2.5.1 Adjusting the Position of the ASF Guide Roller LDs

C H E C K When only removing the ASF Assy, you do not need to perform this
P O IN T adjustment. In that case, mark the installing positions of the Guide
Roller LDs before removing them, and make sure to align the
markings when installing the Guide Roller LDs. (Refer to 4.4.6 ASF
Assy (p108))

1. After installing the "4.4.6 ASF Assy" (p108), loosen the two C.B.S. M3x6 screws
that secure the Guide Roller LD. Combination Gear 29.11

Front 2) C.B.S. M3x6

(8±1 kgf.cm)

Guide Roller LD

LD Roller
Rib Dowel

Hopper Pad

LD Roller Shaft Guide Roller LD

Figure 5-33. Raising the Hopper

Figure 5-32. Guide Roller LD

Adjustment Adjustment 161

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

3. Light the printer's inside through a gap between the Roll Paper Frame and the ASF 4. Align the guide pin and tab on the 0 Digit Side Guide Roller LD with the
Assy with a penlight, and look the tab on the Retard Roller Holder at the back of positioning holes on the Main Frame, and tighten the Guide Roller LD (0 Digit
the two reference tabs on the ASF Assy through the notch. After making sure that Side) with the screws. (See Fig.5-35.)
the two reference tabs are aligned when viewed edge-on, adjust the position of the
5. Check the position of the Retard Roller Holder Tab again through the notch. If it is
Retard Roller Holder Tab by pressing the Guide Roller LD (0 digit side) so that it
not inside the range, remove the screws on the Guide Roller LD (0 Digit Side), and
is placed within the range as shown in the simplified diagram in Figure 5-34.
repeat steps 2 to 4 to set the tab within the range.
6. Check the clearance in both ends of the positioning hole that the Guide Roller LD
Roll Paper Frame Tab is inserted. And align Guide Roller LD (130 Digit Side) to the same height,
and tighten with the screws.

Gap
Guide pin

Tab

Figure 5-35. Checking the Position of Tab on the Guide Roller LD

C H E C K The following are the possible troubles for misadjustment.

Reference P O IN T
tabs
Tab Position Trouble
Above upper limit • Paper feed mistakes caused by non-feed
Retard Roller • Skewing of business cards
Holder tab
Notch Below lower limit • Multiple-sheet feeding

Reference Retard Roller Holder Tab

Tabs

Lower Limit Upper Limit

Aligning position for bottom of Retard Aligning position for top of Retard
Roller Holder tab with reference tabs Roller Holder tab with reference tabs
Figure 5-34. Aligning the Position of the Guide Roller LD (0 Digit Side)

Adjustment Adjustment 162

 CHAPTER

6
MAINTENANCE
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

6.1 Overview 6.1.2 Service Maintenance

If print irregularity (missing dot, white line, etc.) has occurred or the printer indicates
This section provides information to maintain the printer in its optimum condition.
“Maintenance Error”, take the following actions to clear the error.

6.1.1 Cleaning 6.1.2.1 Head Cleaning

This printer has no mechanical components which require regular cleaning. Therefore, The printer has a built-in head cleaning function, which is activated by operating the
when returning the printer to the user, check the following parts and perform control panel.The procedure is given below.
appropriate cleaning if stain is noticeable.
1. Confirm that the printer is in stand-by state.
 Never use chemical solvents, such as thinner, benzine, and Check that the Power LED is not flashing.
C A U T IO N
acetone, to clean the exterior parts of the printer like the 2. Hold down the Ink Switch on the control panel for more than 3 seconds.
housing. These chemicals may degrade or deteriorate the The Power LED flashes during the cleaning sequence.
quality of this product.
 Be careful not to damage any components when you clean C H E C K For Head Cleaning, it is recommended to run the nozzle check and
inside the printer. P O IN T the cleaning alternately to minimize ink consumption.
 Do not scratch the surface of the PF Roller assembly. Use a soft
brush to wipe off dust.
 Use a soft cloth moistened with dilute alcohol to remove ink
stain.
 Do not use the supplied cleaning sheet for normal usage. It may
damage the coated surface of the PF Roller. If the adhesive
surface of the cleaning sheet is set to the ASF LD Roller side
and used to clean the ASF LD Roller surface, it is no problem.
 When using compressed air products; such as air duster, for
cleaning during repair and maintenance, the use of such
products containing flammable gas is prohibited.

 Housing
Use a clean soft cloth moistened with water and wipe off any dirt. If the Housings
are stained with ink, use a cloth moistened with neutral detergent to wipe it off.
 Inside the printer
Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any paper dust.

Maintenance Overview 164

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

6.1.2.2 Maintenance Request  Waste Ink Pads to be replaced

Waste ink is discharged to Waste Ink Pads via the Cap Unit. The printer has counter Table 6-1. List of Waste Ink Pads to be replaced
function that counts how much waste ink is held in the Waste Ink Pads and stores the
Parts name Qty. Reference Pages
value in the EEPROM as "Protection Counter A" and "Protection Counter B" (home
and non-home side). When the counter reaches the predetermined upper limit, the POROUS PAD, INK EJ, LEFT, LOWER 1 4.4.8 Waste Ink Pad /
POROUS PAD, INK EJ, LEFT, UPPER 1 Waste Ink Tube Left/
printer causes the Maintenance Request error to indicate that the Waste Ink Pads is
Right (p112)
nearly saturated. POROUS PAD, INK EJ, RIGHT, LOWER 2

 Protection Counters Upper Limit POROUS PAD, INK EJ, RIGHT, UPPER 1
POROUS PAD, INK EJECT, IS, LEFT 1
Waste Ink Counter Limits POROUS PAD, INK EJECT, IS, LOWER; FB 1
Protection Counter A 21,500 (Stylus Photo R1900) POROUS PAD, INK EJECT, IS, LOWER, LEFT 1
22,500 (Stylus Photo R2880) POROUS PAD, INK EJECT, TUBE; FA 1
Protection Counter B 7,030 POROUS PAD, INK EJECT, TUBE; FB 1
POROUS PAD, INK EJECT, THIS SIDE 1
 Timing for Replacing the Waste Ink Pads POROUS PAD, PAPER GUIDE, INK EJECT, UPPER 1 4.4.14 Front Paper
Guide / Paper EJ
 When the Protection Counter reaches the value shown above, a Maintenance POROUS PAD, PAPER GUIDE, INK EJECT, LEFT 1
Roller / Front Paper
Request is indicated. POROUS PAD, PAPER GUIDE, INK EJECT, RIGHT 1
Guide Pad Tray (p121)
 When servicing the printer, always check the Protection Counter using the
Adjustment Program regardless of whether the Maintenance Request error has
been indicated or not. If the counter is close to its upper limit shown above,  After the Replacement
replace the Waste Ink Pads and reset the counter to "0" with receiving prior Reset the Protection Counter (Refer to Chapter 5 Adjustment (p.139))
approval from the user. This prevents the printer from causing the
Maintenance Request error soon after it is returned to the user.

Maintenance Overview 165

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

6.1.3 Lubrication <Lubrication Point>

Apply it on two points
The lubrication used for the components of the printer has been decided on based on each (top/bottom) Shaft of Printer Cover Holder Left/
Right (two points each)
evaluation carried out by Epson. Therefore, the specified amount and places of
lubrication given in this section should be strictly observed. <Lubrication Type>
G-26
C A U T IO N  Never use oil or grease other than those specified in this <Lubrication Amount>
manual. Use of different types of oil or grease may damage the φ1mm x 20mm x 2 ponits
components or affect the printer functions.
<Remarks>
 Never apply a larger amount of oil or grease than specified in
• Apply with a syringe.
this manual. (Pin Head: φ1mm)
• Clean them with alcohol before
Printer Cover Printer Cover
Table 6-2. Grease Applied to the EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/ Holder Right Holder Left
lubrication.
R2000s
Figure 6-1. Lubrication (1)
Type Name EPSON CODE Supplier
Grease G-26 1080614 EPSON <Lubrication Point>
Adjust Parallel Bushing (Right) Left and Right Adjust Parallel
Grease G-45 1033657 EPSON
Bushings (outer circumference)
Grease G-71 1304682 EPSON
<Lubrication Type>
G-26
<Lubrication Amount>
φ1mm x 2mm
<Remarks>
• Apply with a syringe.
Right Side Face (Pin Head: φ1mm)
• After lubrication, install and turn
Adjust Parallel Bushing (Left) the PG Cam Bush to spread the
grease evenly.

Left Side Face

Figure 6-2. Lubrication (2)

Maintenance Overview 166

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

<Lubrication Point> <Lubrication Point>

Contact point of the CR Scale Left Side Right Side Bushings of the Left and Right PG
Mounting Plate (Left/Right) and the Cams (inner circumference)
Main Frame <Lubrication Type>
<Lubrication Type> G-26
G-26 <Lubrication Amount>
<Lubrication Amount> 1mm diameter of the inner
Apply evenly. circumference

Left Side Right Side <Remarks> <Remarks>

Apply with a brush. • Apply with a brush.
• Be careful not to attach the grease
Figure 6-3. Lubrication (3)
to the PF scale.

<Lubrication Point> Figure 6-5. Lubrication (5)

Contact point of the Main Frame and
the CR the Scale Mounting Plate Right PG Torsion Spring
<Lubrication Point>
(Left/Right) Contact point of the Left and Right PG
Torsion Springs and the Carriage
<Lubrication Type>
Shaft.
G-26
<Lubrication Type>
<Lubrication Amount>
G-26
A little at 4 points
<Lubrication Amount>
<Remarks>
φ1mm x 2mm x 2 points
Left Side Apply with a brush.
<Remarks>
Right Side Apply with a syringe.
(Pin Head: φ1mm)

Left PG Torsion Spring

Right Side

Figure 6-4. Lubrication (4) Left Side

Figure 6-6. Lubrication (6)

Maintenance Overview 167

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

<Lubrication Point> <Lubrication Point>

Rear Paper EJ Roller
Contact point of the rear side of CR Contact point of the EJ Grounding
Guide Plate and the slider of the Spring and Front and Rear Paper EJ
Rear side of CR Guide Plate
Carriage Unit Rollers
<Lubrication Type> <Lubrication Type>
G-71 G-45
<Lubrication Amount> <Lubrication Amount>
150 ± 50mg φ1mm x 2mm x 2 points
EJ Grounding
<Remarks> Spring <Remarks>
Apply with a brush. Apply with a syringe.
Front Paper EJ Roller Right Side
(Pin Head: φ1mm)
Figure 6-7. Lubrication (7)
Figure 6-10. Lubrication (10)
<Lubrication Point>
<Lubrication Point>
The Driven Pulley Holder Right Side
1 The bushing of the Front Paper Guide
Front Paper
<Lubrication Type> Guide <Lubrication Type>
G-26
G-45
<Lubrication Amount>
<Lubrication Amount>
φ1mm x 2mm x 4 points
1 1. Apply evenly.
<Remarks>
2. φ1mm x 2mm
Apply with a syringe.
(Pin Head: φ1mm) <Remarks>
Apply with a brush.
2
Figure 6-8. Lubrication (8)
Left Side
<Lubrication Point>
Contact point of the Driven Release
FLAG and the Upper Paper Guide
Upper Paper Guide
<Lubrication Type> 1

G-26
<Lubrication Amount>
φ1mm x 5mm x 6 points
<Remarks> Front Paper
Apply with a syringe. Guide
(Pin Head: φ1mm)
Figure 6-11. Lubrication (11)
Figure 6-9. Lubrication (9)

Maintenance Overview 168

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

<Lubrication Point> 6.1.3.1 Lubrication of Carriage Shaft

1. Left side of the PF Roller Shaft 1. Fit the Carriage Unit onto the Carriage Shaft, and move it to the center of the
(Left of the E-Ring) Shaft.
2. Mounting location of the Bushing
1 8 C A U T IO N In the following step, do not bring the needle of a syringe into
<Lubrication Type> contact with the Carriage Shaft.
G-45
<Lubrication Amount>
2 1. Approx. φ1mm x 5mm
2. All around the Shaft
2. Using a syringe, lubricate the holes (2 places) at both ends of the Carriage Unit
<Remarks> rear side with grease.
Bushing 8 PF Roller
1. Apply with a syringe.
2. Apply with a brush. Lubrication Type Lubrication Amount
Figure 6-12. Lubrication (12) G-71 280mg x 2 points

<Lubrication Point>
PF Grounding Spring Rear Paper Guide Carriage Unit
1. Contact point of the Rear Paper
1 Guide and the PF Roller
2. Contact point of the PF Grounding
Spring and the PF Roller
<Lubrication Type> Carriage Shaft Holes

G-45
<Lubrication Amount>
PF Roller 2 1. Apply evenly.
1
2. φ1mm x 2mm
<Remarks>
1. Apply with a brush.
2. Apply with a syringe.
(Pin Head: φ1mm)
Figure 6-13. Lubrication (13)

Figure 6-14. Lubricating the Carriage Shaft (1)

Maintenance Overview 169

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

3. Hold the Carriage Unit, and while turning the Carriage Shaft clockwise and 5. Hold the Carriage Unit, and while turning the Carriage Shaft, move the Carriage
counterclockwise, move the Carriage Unit to spread the grease evenly. Unit to the left end of the Carriage Shaft to lubricate the grease evenly.
6. Lubricate grease with the syringe at the point shown in Figure 6-17.

Lubrication Type Lubrication Amount

G-71 140mg

Lubrication Point

Figure 6-15. Lubricating the Carriage Shaft (2)

4. Move the Carriage Unit to the right end of the Carriage Shaft viewing the Unit
from the rear, and lubricate grease with the syringe at the point shown in Figure
6-16.
Figure 6-17. Lubricating the Carriage Shaft (4)
Lubrication Type Lubrication Amount
G-71 140mg

Lubrication Point

Figure 6-16. Lubricating the Carriage Shaft (3)

Maintenance Overview 170

EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

7. Hold the Carriage Unit, and while turning the Carriage Shaft, move the Carriage
Unit to the right end of the Carriage Shaft to lubricate the grease evenly.

Figure 6-18. Lubricating the Carriage Shaft (5)

8. Repeat Step 4 ~ 7.

Maintenance Overview 171

 CHAPTER

7
APPENDIX
EPSON Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

7.1 Connector Summary 7.2 Exploded Diagram / Parts List

This section shows the connections between the main components of the printer. This manual does not provide exploded diagrams or parts list.
For the information, see SPI (Service Parts Information).

C698MAIN
(Power Supply
Board) C698 LED Board

Control Panel
C698MAIN (C698 Panel Board)
(Main Board)
CDR Sensor
Cover Open
Sensor
High Voltage Module

CN11, CN12, CN13, CN14

Printhead

Ink Mark
Sensor

Relay
Board

Table 7-1. Connection of the Major Components

Appendix Connector Summary 173

 CHAPTER

8
STYLUS PHOTO R2000/R2000s
Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

8.1 Product Description

The Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s are inkjet color printer, and it was made based
on the mechanism of the Stylus Phoro R1900.Therefore, this chapter describes
the specification and the functions that are unique to the Stylus Photo R2000/
R2000s. About other information, please refer to Chapter 1 to Chapter 7 for the
information on the Stylus Photo R1900. This chapter includes :

 Features
Describes the features that are unique to the Stylus Photo R2000/
R2000s.(Case specifications,Network interface, Ink cartridge,
Nozzle configration, Ink scrambling sequence,
Operation buttons & indicators)
 Disassembly
Describes the parts that are unique to the Styulus Photo R2000/
R2000s.(Housing, Panel unit, Wireless LAN board)
 Adjustment
Describes the Adjustment items that are unique to the
Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s.
(MAC address, PF motor heat protection control,
Initialize front tray print conter, Disable front tray print counter,
Mist recovery check, Colorimetric Calibration,
Multi Sensor Adjustment (Ink Mark sensor adjustment))

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Product Description 175

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

8.2 Features 8.2.1 Casing specifications

 Dimensions :622.1 mm (W) x 324.0 mm (D) x 219.0 mm (H)
 Casing specifications
(Paper support and stacker are closed. Rubber feet are included.)
 Network interface  Weight :12.3 kg
 Ink cartridge (Without ink cartridges, CDR Tray, Roll paper holders)

 Nozzle configuration
 Ink scrambling sequence
 Operation buttons & indicators

Paper Support & Stacker are closed

Paper Support & Stacker are opened

Figure 8-1. External View

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Features 176

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

8.2.2 Network Interface  Wireless LAN

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s can be connected to the network via Wired LAN The following interface is equipped for the Wireless LAN connection.
or Wireless LAN connection. (They can not be used simultaneously.) The :

Table 8-3. Wireless LAN

following describes each Interface.
Item Content
 Wired LAN
Applied Standard Conforms to IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, IEEE802.11n
The following interface is equipped for the Wired LAN connection. The (2.4GHz spectrum band
wireless network
communication mode can be selected from auto setting or fixed setting.
standards)
Table 8-1. Wired LAN Wireless Operation IEEE802.11b DS-SS (Half Duplex)
Mode
Item Content IEEE802.11g OFDM (Half Duplex)
Connector RJ-45 receptacle*: 1 port IEEE802.11n OFDM (Half Duplex)
Communication Speed For either 10Base-T or 100Base-TX, the Full Duplex or Half Communication Mode Ad-hoc (IBSS) or Infrastructure (ESS)
Duplex can be selected. Roaming Function Not Supported
Note * : 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet is supported. MDI/MDI-X is selected automatically. Output Signal Intensity 10mW
:

Table 8-2. Combination of the Wired LAN communication mode settings Antenna Built-in antenna (Diversity function is not supported)
Setting of this printer Setting of the connected device
Auto Setting Auto Setting (AUTO)
100BASE-TX Half Duplex Table 8-4. Available Channels and Standard
10BASE-T Half Duplex Communication Speed
Frequency Band (GHz) Channel IEEE Standard
(bps)*
100BASE-TX Full Duplex 100BASE-TX Full Duplex
2.400 - 2.4835 1 - 13 802.11b 11/5.5/2/1M
100BASE-TX Half Duplex Auto Setting (AUTO)
2.400 - 2.4835 1 - 13 802.11g 54/48/36/24/18/ 12/9/6M
100BASE-TX Half Duplex
2.400 - 2.4835 1 - 13 802.11n Refer to Table 8-5
10BASE-T Full Duplex 10BASE-T Full Duplex
2.471 - 2.497 14 802.11b 11/ 5.5/2/1M
10BASE-T Half Duplex Auto Setting (AUTO)
Note "*": The communication speed will be changed automatically, depending on radio wave
10BASE-T Half Duplex
strength. bps = bit per second.

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Features 177

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 8-5. Communication Speed for 802.11n*1 *2  Switching Wired/Wireless LAN

Bandwidth = 20MHz Bandwidth= 40MHz This printer can be connect to the network via either Wired LAN or Wireless LAN
MCS Index
GI = 800ns GI = 400ns GI = 800ns GI = 400ns connection only.
0 6.5 7 (7.2) 13.5 15 Enabling/disabling the Wireless LAN can be made from the Control Panel. When the
1 13 14 (14.4) 27 30 Wireless LAN is enabled, it gets priority over the Wired LAN regardless of whether
the LAN Cable is connected. The default Wireless LAN setting is “Disabled”.
2 19.5 21.5 (21.7) 40.5 45
3 26 28.5 (28.9) 54 60 Table 8-6. Wireless LAN Setting from the Control Panel
4 39 43 (43.3) 81 90 LAN Cable Connection State
Setting from Control Panel
5 52 57.5 (57.8) 108 120 Connected Disconnected
6 58.5 65 121.5 135 Wireless LAN Disabled
Wired LAN ---*
(Default)
7 65 72 (72.2) 135 150
Enabled Wireless LAN Wireless LAN
MCS : Modulation and Coding Scheme GI : Guard Interval
Note *1: After the decimal point is displayed by the 0.5Mbps.Number in parentheses is Note * : No service via network is available without connecting the LAN Cable (because
defined value of 802.11n standard. network communication is not established.) except printing a status sheet or the like.

*2: For regulation of Radio Law, if Bandwidth is fixed to 20MHz by exporting area,
maximum of Communication Speed is restricted to upper limit of 20MHz.

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Features 178

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

8.2.3 Ink Cartridge  Color of the ink cartridge

EPSON COOL WHITE
Describes the specification of the ink cartridge.
 Product numbers of the EPSON ink cartridges
Table 8-7. Product No. of Ink Cartridges
Color Code
Photo Black T1591
Matte Black T1598
Light Black ---
Light Light Black ---
Cyan T1592
Light Cyan --- For Stylus Photo R1900/R2880 For Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s
Magenta T1593
Vivid Magenta ---
Vivid Light Magenta ---
Yellow T1594 C A U T IO N  The ink cartridge cannot be refilled.
Orange T1599  Do not use expired ink cartridges.
Red T1597  The ink in the ink cartridge freezes at -16 °C (3.2 oF). It takes
Gloss Optimizer T1590 about three hours under 25 °C (77oF) until the ink thaws and
becomes usable.
 Shelf life
Two years from production date (if unopened), six months after opening package.
 Storage Temperature
Table 8-8. Storage Temperature
Situation Storage Temperature Limit
When stored in individual boxes -20 oC to 40oC

(-4oF to 104oF) 1 month max. at 40 oC

When installed in main unit -20 oC to 40 oC (104oF)
(-4oF to 104oF)

 Dimension
12.7 mm (W) x 68 mm (D) x 57 mm (H)
 Equipped with the plate of scrambling
For the purpose, please refer to Section.

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Features 179

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

8.2.4 Nozzle Configuration 8.2.5 Ink Scrambling Sequence

Table 8-9. Nozzle Configuration  Purpose
Item Specification
To prevent the inks from settling at the bottom, and to reduce variations of
Nozzle Black : 180 nozzles x 2
Configuration (Photo Black, Matte Black) color for printing, Ink Scrambling Sequence is executed. The Scrambling
Color : 180 nozzles x 6 Board of the ink cartridges are operated by CR moving.
(Red, Orange, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Gloss Optimizer)
 Timing of Ink Scrambling
 Ink charge
 Ink cartridge replacement
 Power on
 User Selects the Ink Scrambling (Printer Driver)
 Count of CR Reciprocating
Table 8-10. Count of CR Reciprocating
Timing Color Days*1 Count*2
Ink charge All --- 60
Ink cartridge 0 ~ 365 60
replacement 366 ~ 730 60
Cyan
731 ~ 1095 270
1096 ~ 270
0 ~ 365 30
Yellow, Magenta, 366 ~ 730 30
Matte Black, Red, Orange,
731 ~ 1095 270
Photo Black
1096 ~ 270
Gloss Optimizer --- 0
Power On 0 ~ 30 0
All 31 ~ 183 60
184 ~ 60
User selects the
All --- 60
Ink Scrambling

Note *1: Days of "Ink cartridge replacement" means Days after production of Ink cartridges.
Days of “Power On” means Days after the previous Ink Scrambling.
*2: 0.45sec / 1 reciprocation

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Features 180

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

8.2.6 Operation Buttons & Indicators (LEDs)

Network LED
 Operation Buttons (Left : Green, Right : Yellow) Power LED Paper LED Ink LED
This printer has the following six operation buttons.
Table 8-11. Operation Buttons
Button Function
Power Turns the power ON/OFF.
Paper Feeds or ejects paper.
Ink Runs a sequence of ink cartridge replacement or cleaning.
Roll Paper Prints the cutting line on the roll paper or feeds the paper
backwards out of the printer.
Network status sheet Prints the network status sheet. Power Button
Wi-Fi Adjust setting for connection to wireless LANs.
Wi-Fi Button Paper Button Ink Button

 Indicators (LEDs) Network status sheet Button Roll Paper Button

Thirteen indicators (LEDs) are provided to indicate settings or printer status.
Table 8-12. Indicators (LEDs)
LED Function Figure 8-2. Button & Indicators (LEDs)
Power LED (Green) Lights at power-on.
Flashes during some sequence is in progress.
Flashes at high speed during power-OFF sequence.
Ink LED (Red) Lights or flashes when an ink-related error occurs.*
Paper LED (Red) Lights or flashes when an paper- or CDR-related error occurs.*
Cartridge LED (Red) x 8 Indicates an ink-related error of each ink cartridge.*
Network LED Lights or flashes during network sequence.
(Green / Yellow)

Note "*": See "8-14 Indicators (LEDs) Function" (p.183)for the LED status at error
occurrence.

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Features 181

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

 Operation Buttons & LEDs Functions Table 8-13. Operation Button Functions
Button Printer Status Function
Table 8-13. Operation Button Functions
Roll Paper (when On • Ejects the paper backwards out of the printer.
Button Printer Status Function
held for three • When an ink cartridge has been set in the ink
Power Off • Tuns the power on. seconds or longer) replacement position, moves the carriage to the
On • Turns the power off. home position.
Ink On • Runs a sequence of ink cartridge replacement. Network status sheet On • Prints the network status sheet.
The carriage moves to set the ink cartridge to the (when held for three
position for replacement. seconds or longer)
• When an ink cartridge has been set in the ink Wi-Fi On • Recovers from a error for Wireless easy setting
replacement position, moves the carriage to the Wi-Fi On • Starts Wireless easy setting
home position.
(when held for three • Sets WPS-PBC (Automatically)
Paper On • Feeds or ejects paper.* second or longer)
• Recovers from a multi-feed error and feeds paper Network status sheet On • Sets WPS-PIN
to restart the print job. + Wi-Fi
• Feeds paper when paper is loaded after a no- (combination)
paper error occurs. Power + Ink At power on • Turns the power on in rub reduction mode when
• Ejects a jammed paper when a paper jam error (combination) connected to DSC (digital still camera).
occurs. Power + Ink On • Forcefully turns the power off.
• Cancels the print job during printing. (combination) (Hold
• Runs a sequence of ink cartridge replacement down the Ink button
when an ink-out, or ink color error occurs. The for seven seconds or
carriage moves to set the ink cartridge to the longer)
position for replacement. Power + Paper * At power on • Prints a nozzle check pattern when not connected
• When an ink cartridge has been set in the ink (combination) to the PC.
replacement position, moves the carriage to the Power + Network At power on • Returns the network settings to factory default
home position. status sheet setting
During CDR • Recovers from a paper jam error. (combination)
printing • Cancels the print job during printing. Note "*": The paper cannot be fed or ejected if the CDR Tray Base is open.
Ink On • Runs a head cleaning.
(when held for three • Runs a sequence of ink cartridge replacement
seconds or longer) when ink level low, ink out, no ink cartridge, or
ink color error*2 has occurred.
Roll Paper On • Feeds the roll paper to the cutting position and
prints a cutting line.
• Returns the cutting position.
• When an ink cartridge has been set in the ink
replacement position, moves the carriage to the
home position.

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Features 182

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 8-14. Indicators (LEDs) Function Table 8-14. Indicators (LEDs) Function
Indicators (LEDs) Indicators (LEDs)
Priority Priority
Printer Status NW Printer Status NW *1
Power Paper Ink Wi-FI *1 Power Paper Ink Wi-FI
sheet sheet
Power OFF Flashes at OFF OFF -- -- Data processing / Printing from Flashes -- -- -- --
high speed 1 camera
Fatal Error OFF Flashes at Flashes at -- -- Access point setting error -- -- -- -- Flashes at
high speed high speed 2 (Security key exchange) high speed
Maintenance request OFF Flashes Flashes -- -- Access point setting error (General) -- -- -- -- Flashes
alternately alter nately 3 Access point setting error -- -- -- -- Flashes
1 2 (Registration)
CDR guide error -- Flashes 2 Flashes at -- -- Access point setting error -- -- -- -- Flashes
high speed 4 (PINCODE authentication)
Paper path error -- Flashes -- -- -- Success Wireless LAN setting -- -- -- -- ON *4
Paper (CDR) jam -- Flashes -- -- -- 5 Cannot set Wireless LAN -- -- -- -- Flashes
Cover open error -- Flashes -- -- -- During push-button setting -- -- -- Flashes Flashes
Multi-feed error -- ON -- -- -- alternately alternately
2 1
No paper error -- ON -- -- -- 6
During PINCODE setting -- -- -- Flashes Flashes
CDR tray error -- ON -- -- -- 12*3
simultaneo simultaneo
During Ink scrambling sequence Flashes 3 -- -- -- -- 7 usly usly
Ink cartridge replacement is in Flashes -- -- -- -- During receiving data Flashes -- -- Flashes --
progress 8
Network initialization start -- -- -- ON ON
Ink sequence is in progress Flashes -- -- -- -- 9 (LED ON)
CSIC error -- -- ON *2 -- -- Network initialization start -- -- -- OFF OFF
10
No ink cartridge or ink-out error -- -- ON *2 -- -- (LED OFF)
Ink Color error -- -- Flashes at -- -- State of initialization start -- -- -- Flashes Flashes
high speed 11 alternately alternately
*2 2 1
Note *1: When two or more errors occur at the same time, the one with higher priority will be indicated. Non connection -- -- -- OFF --
*2: The cartridge LED corresponding to each ink cartridge lights. During Wireless LAN connection -- -- -- ON --
*3: NW sheet LED and Wi-Fi LED don't depend on the priority of other LEDs. (having IP)
*4: After the setting succeeds, LED is turned on for 5 minutes, and turned off. During Wired LAN connection -- -- -- OFF ON
(having IP)
(Conformed to Display specification of WPS formula)
Non support device connection -- Flashes2 Flashes3
13
Note : -- : No change non compliant Hub -- Flashes 4 Flashes
Flash: Repeats turning On and Off every 1.25 seconds. Ink low -- -- Flashes*2 14
Flash 2: Repeats On for 0.5 seconds, Off for 0.5 seconds, During camera connection Flashes 4 -- --
On for 0.5 seconds, and Off for 1.0 second. (Head rubbing reduction ON)
15
Flash 3: Repeats Off for 0.5 seconds, On for 0.5 seconds, During camera connection Flashes 2 -- --
(Head rubbing reduction OFF)
Off for 0.5 seconds, and On for 1.0 second.
During Power ON sequence Flashes -- -- 16
Flash 4: Repeats On for 2.0 seconds and Off for 0.5 seconds.
Flash at high speed: Repeats turning On and Off every 0.5 seconds.
Flashes alternately 1: Same as the “Flash”
Flashes alternately 2: Repeats turning Off and On every 1.25 seconds.

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Features 183

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

 Errors & Remedies Error Contents Remedies

Error Contents Remedies Access point setting Error has occurred by Executes access point setting again.
error (Security key exchanging security
Fatal error A mechanical error has
Turn the power Off and back it On. exchange) key to access point.
occurred.
Access point setting Error has occurred Executes access point setting again.
Maintenance request Waste ink pads need to Replace the waste ink pads and reset the error (General) during setting Wireless
be replaced. counter. LAN to access point.
CDR guide error The CDR Tray Base Close the CDR Tray Base. Access point setting Registration error has Executes access point setting again.
was opened when error (Registration) occurred by registering
receiving or printing a to access point.
ASF print job.
Access point setting Error has occurred by Executes access point setting again.
The CDR Tray Base Open the CDR Tray Base. error (PINCODE failure of PINCODE
was closed when authentication) authentication during
receiving or printing a setting Wireless LAN
CDR print job. to access point.
Paper jam A paper jam has <When printing on paper> Cannot set Wireless When sets Wireless Disconnects Wired LAN, and executes
occurred. Remove the jammed paper and press LAN LAN, Wired LAN is accesss point setting again.
the Paper button.*1 connected.
<When printing on CDR>
Remove the jammed CDR tray and Note : For detail of remedy, please refer to Troubleshooting according to Error Messages (p.36).
press the Paper button. Note *1: When the CDR Tray Base is opened, close the CDR Tray Base and press the Paper button.

No paper Failed to feed paper Load paper correctly and press the *2: When the CDR tray has been inserted, remove the CDR tray and press the Ink button.
Paper button.*1
Multi-feed Multiple sheets of Press the Paper button to eject the
paper were fed at the multiple sheets.*1
same time.
Ink-out The cartridge has run Replace the cartridge with a new one.*2
out of ink.
No ink cartridge Ink cartridge(s) was not Replace the cartridge with a new one.*2
detected.
Wrong ink cartridge Incorrect ink Replace the cartridge with the correct
cartridge(s) was one.*2
detected.
Paper path error The paper was loaded Eject the fed paper and press the Paper
in a different way from button after loading paper in the
the specified one. specified way.
Cover open error Printing was executed Close the Printer Cover.
with the Printer Cover
open.
Cleaning after black ink Replace the black ink cartridge with the
Ink Color error*3 replacement cannot be one used before the error, or the one that
performed. has sufficient amount of ink.

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Features 184

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

8.3 Disassembly
8.3.1 Summary
This section describes changed parts & new parts for Stylus Photo R2000/
R2000s only. For assembling of other parts, please refer to the information of
Stylus Photo R1900/R2880. ("4.1.7 Disassembly" (p.77)) In addition, the
caution points are same as Stylus Photo R1900 / R2880.

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Disassembly 185

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

8.3.2 Procedure of Disassembly

The flowchart below lists the step-by-step disassembly procedures.

Start

Front Decoration Panel FFC Cover Paper Support Assy C H E C K  The boxes shown in a dotted-line are not the shortest
Rear Housing Plate Left/Right Stacker Assy
(p.79) (p.187) (p.78) (p.78) P O IN T procedures, but are necessary to proceed to the next step.
(p.79)
 Since a prototype was used to illustrate these disassembly
Front Decoration Cover Open Sensor
Plate Left/Right Panel Unit and assembly procedures, the appearance of some parts
(p.188) (p.138)
(p.79) may differ from those on an actual product.
Decoration Plate  This section describes the parts of red frame only. For
Left/Right (p.82) other parts, please refer to the procedure of Stylus Photo
R1900 / R2880/R2000/R2000s.
Panel FFC Cover
(p.187)

Panel Unit
(p.188)

Upper Housing /
Printer Cover (p.83)

Upper Housing PF Encoder High Voltage LED Board APG Assy CR Scale CR Motor Wireless LAN Board Printhead / CSIC
Support Assy (p.85) (p.134) Module (p.89) (p.88) (p.91) (p.92) (p.131) Assy (p.190) Assy (p.94)

Lower Housing / Board Assy (Main

Paper EJ Frame Board / Power Supply CR Scale
Printer Mechanism Assy / Front Cover (p.92)
(p.98) Board) (p.191)
/ CDR Tray Base
(p.114)
Waste Ink Pad / Waste Front Paper Guide PictBridge Holder LED Board
ASF Assy PF Motor Foot (p.113)
(p.108) Ink Tube Left/Right Pad (p.111) Assy (p.113) (p.88)
(p.132) (p.112)

Front Paper Guide / CDR Release APG Assy

Release Holder PE Sensor Holder ASF Motor Lever Sub Assy CDR Sensor
Assy (p.127) (p.137) (p.133) Paper EJ Roller / Front (p.136) (p.91)
Paper Guide Pad Tray (p.116)
(p.121)
FLAG Release Carriage Shaft /
Assy (p.128) Carriage Unit
PF Encoder Ink System Unit
(p.134) (p.118)
PE Sensor Holder Ink Mark Sensor / CR Encoder
(p.137) PW sensor (p.135) (p.134)
Upper Paper Guide
Assys (p.129)
Upper Paper Guide
Assys (p.129)
PF Roller Shaft
(p.124)

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Disassembly 186

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

 Panel FFC Cover 3. Remove the screw (C.B.P 3x10) (x1) of the part for fixing the Panel FFC
1. Open the Printer Cover. Cover, and remove the part.

C A U T IO N Before opening the Front Cover and the CDR Tray Base, unlock
the Carriage. (Refer to "4.1.6 Locking/Unlocking the Carriage and
Opening/Closing the CDR Tray Base (p75)")

2. Open the Front Cover and the CDR Tray Base

Part for fixing C.B.P 3x10
Printer Cover (6±1kgf.cm)
Panel FFC Cover
Figure 8-4. Removing the Panel FFC Cover (2)

4. Disengage the hooks (x11) of rear-side of the Panel FFC Cover, and pull
out the rib (x1), remove the Panel FFC Cover.

□ Hook
□ Rib

CDR Tray Base

Front Cover

Figure 8-3. Removing the Panel FFC Cover (1)

Figure 8-5. Removing the Panel FFC Cover (3)

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Disassembly 187

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

 Panel Unit

 Be careful not to get the Panel FFC caught underneath 1. Remove the screws (C.B.P 3x10) (x2)that secure the Panel Unit.
the hooks on the Panel FFC Cover
C.B.P 3x10
 Secure the Panel FFC with double-sided tape as follows.
(6±1kgf.cm)

Panel FFC

Double-sided
tape

CDR Sensor
Cable Figure 8-7. Remove the Panel Unit (1)

2. Disconnect the Panel FFC and CDR Sensor cable from the Panel Board.

Figure 8-6. Panel FFC

CDR Sensor
Panel FFC Cable

Figure 8-8. Remove the Panel Unit (2)

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Disassembly 188

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

 Decoration Plate Left/Right

1. For Decoration Plate Right, Disengage front of the hook (x1) , and lift the Attach the tabs (x6) to the tab holes (x5) and the positioning
Decoration Plate Right while disengaging bottom of the hooks (x2). hole (x1) from the upper-side of the printer.
2. In the same way, remove the Decoration Plate Left.
□ Tab hole
□ Positioning hole

□ Hook

Figure 8-10. Attach the Decoration Plate Left/Right

Figure 8-9. Remove the Decoration Plate Left/Right

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Disassembly 189

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

 Upper Housing / Printer Cover  Wireless LAN Board Assy

1. Remove the screws (C.B.P 3x10) (x6) that secure the Upper Housing, and 1. Remove the screw (C.B.P 3x8) (x1) that secure the earth cable, and remove
lift the Upper Housing/Printer Cover. the screw (C.B.P 3x8) (x1) that secure the Wireless LAN Board Assy.

C.B.P 3x10
(6±1kgf.cm) Wireless LAN
Board Cable
⑥ ⑤
High Voltage
Module Cable
PictBridge Holder
Earth Cable
Wireless LAN
Board Earth Cable

C.B.P 3x8
(6±1kgf.cm)
③
④ ①
② C.B.P 3x10 Figure 8-12. Remove the Wireless LAN Board Assy (1)
(6±1kgf.cm)

Figure 8-11. Remove the Upper Housing / Printer Cover 2. Disengage the hook (x1).

Tighten the screws in the order show in Figure 8-11.

Hook

Hook Hole

Figure 8-13. Remove the Wireless LAN Board Assy (2)

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Disassembly 190

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

3. Disconnect the Wireless LAN Board cable, and remove the Wireless LAN  Board Assy (Main Board / Power Supply Board)
Board Assy.  For disassembling the Board Assy, please refer to "4.3.1 Board Assy
(Main Board/Power Supply Board) (p86)".
 Describes the Connector Layout of the Main Board to the following.
Wireless LAN Table 8-15. Main Board Connector
Board Cable
No. Connector No. Connector
CN1 PictBridge CN14 Head FFC
CN4 Panel Board, CDR Sensor, Cover CN22 CSIC
Open Sensor
CN5 Relay FFC (for sensor) CN25 High Voltage Module
CN6 LED Board CN115 CR Motor
CN9 Ink Mark Sensor, CR Encoder CN116 PF Motor
Sensor, PW Sensor
CN11 Head FFC CN117 Pump Motor
CN2 CN12 Head FFC CN118 APG Motor
CN13 Head FFC CN119 ASF Motor
CN2 Wireless LAN Board --- ---

Figure 8-14. Remove the Wireless LAN Board Assy (3) CN1

 Refer to Figure 8-12 for routing the cables. CN119 CN116

 Don't forget to secure the earth cable of the PictBridge CN115 CN118
Holder while securing the earth cable of the Wireless CN117 CN5
LAN Board. CN6
CN13
CN2
CN14
CN4
CN9 CN11
CN22
CN12

CN25

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Disassembly 191

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

8.4 Adjustment
8.4.1 Summary
This section describes new adjustment items & changed adjustment items for
Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s only. For other adjustment items, please refer to
the information of Stylus Photo R1900/R2880. ("5.1.1 Servicing Adjustment
Item List" (p.140))

8.4.2 Servicing Adjustment Item List (For Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s)

The items, purposes and outlines of the Adjustment Program are given in the following table.

Table 8-16. Adjustment Items (For Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s)

Adjustment Purpose Method Outline
MAC address setting Perform MAC address setting if necessary. For the procedure of MAC address setting, refer to Mac address setting(p.195)
(in the Initial setting)
PF motor heat protection This is used to correct variations of motors characteristics. The program will automatically enter a proper correction value onto the printer.
control
Initialize front tray print This conter is added by using the front tray printing. When this The program will automatically enter a initial value onto the printer.
counter conter is added, PF Roller feeds more area of the paper than
Disable front tray print default. When exchange the PF Roller, please initialize this The program will automatically enter a maximum value onto the printer.
counter counter for preventing more than enough paper feeding.
If you can't read the data, please enter the maximum front tray
print counter.
Mist Recovery check To prevent the dirt inside the printer, the mist is induced to the The procedure of the Mist Recovery check is same as High Voltage Module inspection. refer to
direction of the Lower Paper Guide by electricity.The High Voltage Module inspection(p.142)
adjustment name was changed from High Voltage Module
inspection.

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Adjustment 192

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

8.4.3 Required Adjustments

The table below lists the required adjustments depending upon the parts being repaired or replaced. Find the part(s) you removed or replaced, and check which
adjustment(s) must be carried out. About the First dot position adjustment, it's included in the PW adjustment.
Table 8-17. Required Adjustment List
Priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

(Ink Mark Sensor adjustment)

Initial setting / USB ID Input
Support position adjustment
PF Belt tension adjustment

Disenable PF deterioration
Consumables maintenance

Initialize PF deterioration

CR motor heat protection

Head angular adjustment

Multi Sensor Adjustment

PF motor heat protection

Final check pattern print

Colorimetric calibration
ASF Guide Roller LDs
Pf Roller Shaft Center

EEPROM Data Copy

Mist Recovery check
Position adjustment

Initialize front tray

Disable front tray

Adjustment

Bi-D adjustment
PW adjustment
PG adjustment

Head ID Input

PF adjustment
print counter

print counter
Ink charge
Item

counter

control

control
offset

offset
Part Name

Remove --- --- *1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
ASF Assy
Replace --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
CR Motor
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- O
Remove --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O --- O --- --- --- --- O
Printhead
Replace --- --- --- O --- --- --- O --- O --- --- --- --- O O --- O --- --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
Replace
Main Board
--- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
(Read OK)
Replace
--- --- --- --- --- --- O O *1 --- --- O --- O O O O O O O O O O
(Read NG)
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
PS Board
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O O O
High Voltage Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
Module Replace --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
Front Paper Guide/ Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- O --- --- --- O
Paper Eject Roller Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- O --- --- --- O
Remove O O --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- O --- --- --- O
PF Roller Shaft
Replace O O --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- O --- --- --- O --- --- --- O
Remove O O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- O
PF Motor
Replace O O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- O --- O
Waste Ink Pad/ Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
Front Paper Guide
Pad Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Adjustment 193

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 8-17. Required Adjustment List

Priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

(Ink Mark Sensor adjustment)

Initial setting / USB ID Input
Support position adjustment
PF Belt tension adjustment

Disenable PF deterioration
Consumables maintenance

Initialize PF deterioration

CR motor heat protection

Head angular adjustment

Multi Sensor Adjustment

PF motor heat protection

Final check pattern print

Colorimetric calibration
ASF Guide Roller LDs
Pf Roller Shaft Center

EEPROM Data Copy

Mist Recovery check
Position adjustment

Initialize front tray

Disable front tray

Adjustment

Bi-D adjustment
PW adjustment
PG adjustment

Head ID Input

PF adjustment
print counter

print counter
Ink charge
Item

counter

control

control
offset

offset
Part Name

Remove --- --- --- *3 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
Carriage shaft
Replace --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O --- O --- --- --- --- O
Remove --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
Carriage Unit
Replace --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O --- O --- --- --- --- O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- O --- --- --- O
Paper EJ Frame Assy
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- O --- --- --- O
Printer Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
Mechanism Replace O --- O O --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- O --- O O O O O O O --- O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
PW Sensor
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O
Ink Mark Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- O --- --- --- --- --- O
Sensor Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- O --- --- --- --- --- O

Note : “O” indicates that the adjustment must be carried out. “---” indicates that the adjustment
C A U T IO N  When the EEPROM Data Copy cannot be made for the main is not required. If you have removed or replaced multiple parts, make sure to check the
board that needs to be replaced, the Waste Ink Tray Assy must required adjustments for the all parts. And when multiple adjustments must be carried
be replaced after replacing the main board with a new one. out, be sure to carry out them in the order given in the “Priority” row.
 After all required adjustments are completed, use the “Final Note "*1" :When only removing the ASF Assy, you do not need to perform the adjustment. In
check pattern print” function to print all adjustment patterns that case, mark the installing positions before removing them, and make sure to align
for final check. If you find a problem with the printout the markings when installing. See "4.4.6 ASF Assy" (p.108).
"*2" :Replacing the Waste Ink Tray Assy is necessary when resetting waste ink pad counter.
patterns, carry out the adjustment again.
"*3": When only removing the Carriage Shaft, you do not need to perform the adjustment.
 When using a new main board for replacing the Printer
In that case, mark on the Parallelism Adjust Bushing (Left/Right) before removing
Mechanism, the Initial setting must have been made to the them, and make sure to align the markings when installing. See "4.4.5 Carriage
main board. Shaft / Carriage Unit" (p.100).

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Adjustment 194

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

8.4.4 Adjustment Procedure <Setting flowchart>

 Mac address setting
<Overview> START

This printer have a network function and stores there MAC address (Media Access
Control Address) in the EEPROM on the Network Board. The Network Board supplied
as an ASP does not come with the MAC address written on it, therefore, you are Replace the Network Board with a
required to set the MAC address to the new Network Board after replacement. The Is the MAC address on Yes new one.
following explains the procedure. the label readable?
No

C A U T IO N  To avoid a conflict of MAC address on a network, make sure to No

Enter the MAC address written on
the label using the adjustment
correctly follow the MAC address setting flowchart given on program.
Replace the Network Board with a new one.
the right.
 The MAC Address is written correctly, The IP Address will be
initialized also. Attach a new MAC address label on the Upper M/ END
B Shield Plate.
 The user should be notified of the change of MAC address
because of the following reasons.
• If the user has set the printer’s MAC address on a router, the Enter the new MAC address using the adjustment
repaired printer with a new MAC address cannot be program.
connected to the network.
• The default printer name on a network consists of “EPSON”
and the last six digits of the MAC address. Therefore, the END
printer name becomes different from the previous one.
Figure 8-15. MAC Address Setting Flowchart
<Preparation>

When replacing the Network Board, make sure to note down the MAC address written
on a label on the Upper M/B Shield Plate.

C H E C K You are required to enter the last six digits of the MAC address
P O IN T (xx:yy:zz) on the adjustment program.
MAC address example: 00:00:48:xx:yy:zz
(“xx, yy, zz” represents a value unique to each printer)

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Adjustment 195

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

<Setting procedure>

C A U T IO N  The MAC address required on the adjustment program is

written on the MAC address label on the Upper M/B Shield
Plate.
Make sure that the address written on the MAC address label
matches the MAC address settings in the EEPROM.

Label, MAC address

the last six digits of MAC address

Figure 8-16. MAC Address Label Figure 8-17. MAC Address Setting Screen
 Do not use the MAC address of the label attached to the
Wireless LAN Board since the address is not used for this
product.

1. Start the adjustment program.

2. Select the “Initial Setting” from the menu. The initial setting screen appears.
3. Enter the last six digits of MAC address into the MAC address entry field, and
click the MAC Address input button.
(Enter the address again into the second entry field to confirm it.)
4. Select the network status sheet print menu on the printer’s control panel, and print
the sheet. Check the MAC address printed on the sheet to see if it is correct.

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Adjustment 196

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

 Colorimetric Calibration  Multi Sensor Adjustment (Ink Mark Sensor Adjustment)

The procedure of this adjustment is same as Stylus Photo R1900 / 1. Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to check not to appear dot missing.
R2880. Refer to "5.2.4 Colorimetric Calibration" (p.155). But, support
2. Click the “Adjustment” Button. The program automatically adjust the Ink
paper for Calibration Chart is different from the previous models.
Mark Sensor. (Program prints the pattern for adjustment. It's not for
Table 8-18. Support Paper for Colorimetric Calibration checking.)
Purpose Paper
3. Print the check pattern by clicking the "Check" Button.
Nozzle Check Pattern Plain Paper
4. The upper side of the pattern don't have a dot missing.The lower side of the
Calibration Chart Premium Presentation Paper Matte
pattern have eight dot missings on purpose. Confirm the dot-missing
Matte Paper Heavy-weight (Epson Matte)
counts of these patterns.

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Adjustment 197

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

No dot missing patterns

Eight dot missings patterns

Pattern-Alignment :
Y - M - C - Mk
Pk- R - Or
Go

(Dot-missing counts)
The counts show Sensor could recognize the Dot missing for
each color.
Count-Alignment : Y - M - Mk - R - Or - Pk - GO - C

Figure 8-18. Pattern for Multi Sensor Adjustment (Ink Mark Sensor adjustment)

Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s Adjustment 198

 CHAPTER

9
SC-P400 Series
Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

9.1 Product Description 9.2 Features

The SC-P400 Series are inkjet color printer, and it was made based on the  Casing specifications
mechanism of the Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s.Therefore, this chapter  Ink cartridge specifications
describes the specification and the functions that are unique to the SC-P400
Series. About other information, please refer to Chapter 1 to Chapter 8 for the  Operation buttons & indicators
information on the Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s. This chapter 9.2.1 Difference from Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s in
includes: servicing
 Features  PictBridge is not supported.
Describes the features that are unique to the SC-P400 Series.  Ink Mark Sensor is not mounted.
 Disassembly  Newly designed ink cartridges
Describes the parts that are unique to the SC-P400 Series.  Newly designed main board and network board
 Adjustment 9.2.2 Appearance
Describes the adjustment items that are unique to the SC-P400 Series. The external dimensions and appearance are the same as those of Stylus Photo
R2000/R2000s, but the external design differs.

Figure 9-1. Appearance

SC-P400 Series Product Description 200

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

9.2.3 Ink Cartridge Table 9-3. Indicators (LEDs)

Describes the specification of the ink cartridge. LED Function
Power LED (Blue) Lights at power-on.
 Product numbers of the EPSON ink cartridges Flashes during some sequence is in progress.
Flashes at high speed during power-OFF sequence.
Table 9-1. Product No. of Ink Cartridges Ink LED (Orange) Lights or flashes when an ink-related error occurs.*
Color Code Paper LED (Orange) Lights or flashes when an paper- or CDR-related error occurs.*
Photo Black T3**1 Cartridge LED (Orange) x 8 Indicates an ink-related error of each ink cartridge.*
Matte Black T3**8 Network LED (Blue) Lights or flashes during network sequence.
Cyan T3**2 Note "*": See Table 9-5 "Indicators (LEDs) Function" for the LED status at error occurrence.
Magenta T3**3
Yellow T3**4
Orange T3**9
Network LED (Blue) Power LED Paper LED Ink LED
Red T3**7
Gloss Optimizer T3**0

9.2.4 Operation Buttons & Indicators (LEDs)

 Operation Buttons
This printer has the following six operation buttons.
Table 9-2. Operation Buttons
Button Function
Power Button
Power Turns the power ON/OFF.
Wi-Fi Button Paper Button Ink Button
Paper Feeds or ejects paper.
Ink Runs a sequence of ink cartridge replacement or cleaning. Roll Paper Button
Network status sheet Button
Roll Paper Prints the cutting line on the roll paper or feeds the paper
backwards out of the printer.
Network status sheet Prints the network status sheet. Figure 9-2. Button & Indicators (LEDs)
Wi-Fi Adjust setting for connection to wireless LAN.

 Indicators (LEDs)
Thirteen indicators (LEDs) are provided to indicate settings or printer status.

SC-P400 Series Features 201

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

 Operation Buttons & LEDs Functions Table 9-4. Operation Button Functions
Table 9-4. Operation Button Functions Button Printer Status Function
Roll Paper On • Feeds the roll paper to the cutting position and
Button Printer Status Function
prints a cutting line.
Power Off • Tuns the power on.
• Returns the cutting position.
On • Turns the power off.
• When an ink cartridge has been set in the ink
Ink On • Runs a sequence of ink cartridge replacement. replacement position, moves the carriage to the
The carriage moves to set the ink cartridge to the home position.
position for replacement.
Roll Paper (when On • During the roll paper feeding, ejects (feeds back)
• When an ink cartridge has been set in the ink held for three the roll paper backward.
replacement position, moves the carriage to the seconds or longer) • When an ink cartridge has been set in the ink
home position.
replacement position, moves the carriage to the
Paper On • Feeds or ejects paper.* home position.
• Recovers from a multi-feed error and feeds paper Network status sheet On • Prints the network status sheet.
to restart the print job. (when held for three
• Feeds paper when paper is loaded after a no- seconds or longer)
paper error occurs. Wi-Fi On • Recovers from a error for Wireless easy setting
• Ejects a jammed paper when a paper jam error Wi-Fi On • Starts Wireless easy setting
occurs. (when held for three • Sets WPS-PBC (Automatically)
• Cancels the print job during printing. second or longer)
• Runs a sequence of ink cartridge replacement Network status sheet On • Sets WPS-PIN
when an ink-out, or ink color error occurs. The + Wi-Fi
ink cartridges move to the ink replacement (combination)
position-. Power + Paper * At power on • Prints a nozzle check pattern when not connected
• When an ink cartridge has been set in the ink (combination) to the PC.
replacement position, moves the carriage to the Power + Network At power on • Returns the network settings to factory default
home position. status sheet setting
• Cancels the print job during the ink path error. (combination)
• Eject the paper and cancels the print job during Note "*": The paper cannot be fed or ejected if the front manual feed tray is open.
the roll end error.
During CDR • Recovers from a paper jam error. Table 9-5. Indicators (LEDs) Function
printing • Cancels the print job during printing. Indicators (LEDs)
Printer status Priority*1
Ink On • Runs a head cleaning. Power Ink Paper NW1 NW2
(when held for three • Runs a sequence of ink cartridge replacement During firmware update Flashes OFF OFF OFF OFF 1
seconds or longer) when ink level low, ink out, no ink cartridge, or During power OFF Flashes at
OFF OFF -- -- 2
ink color error has occurred. sequence high speed
Preparing firmware update Flashes Flashes
-- -- -- simultaneou simultaneou 3
sly sly
Fatal error Flashes at Flashes at
OFF 4
high speed high speed

SC-P400 Series Features 202

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 9-5. Indicators (LEDs) Function Table 9-5. Indicators (LEDs) Function
Indicators (LEDs) Indicators (LEDs)
Printer status Priority*1 Printer status Priority*1
Power Ink Paper NW1 NW2 Power Ink Paper NW1 NW2
Maintenance request Flashes Flashes Network initialization start
OFF -- -- 5 -- -- -- ON ON 14
(waste ink pad end) alternately2 alternately1 (LED ON)
Front guide error Flashes at Network initialization start
-- Fhashes2 -- -- 6 -- -- -- OFF OFF 14
high speed (LED OFF)
Cover open error -- -- Flashes -- -- 7 State of initialization start Flashes Flashes
-- -- -- 14
alternately2 alternately1
Paper (CDR) jam -- -- Flashes -- -- 7
Without network
Paper path error -- -- Flashes -- -- 7 -- -- -- OFF -- 14
connection
CDR tray error -- -- ON -- -- 8
During Wireless LAN
No paper error -- -- ON -- -- 8 -- -- -- ON -- 14
connection (having IP)
Roll end error -- -- ON -- -- 8 During Wired LAN
-- -- -- OFF OFF 14
Multi-feed error -- -- ON -- -- 8 connection (having IP)
During ink scrambling Ink low -- Flashes*1 -- -- -- 15
Flashes3 -- -- -- -- 9
sequence During power ON
Flashes -- -- -- -- 16
Ink cartridge replacement sequence
Flashes -- -- -- -- 10
is in progress During stand-by state ON -- -- -- -- 17
Ink sequence is in progress Flashes -- -- -- -- 11 Waste ink pad near full -- -- -- -- -- *3

No ink cartridge or ink-out

-- Flashes*1 -- -- -- 12 Note *1: The cartridge LED corresponding to each ink cartridge lights.
error
CSIS error -- Flashes*1 -- -- -- 12 *2: After the setting succeeds, LED is turned on for 5 minutes, and turned off.
Ink color error Flashes at *3: In the waste ink pad near full state, the LED indication on the panel does not change.
-- high -- -- -- 13
speed*1 Note : -- : No change
Flash: Repeats turning On and Off every 1.25 seconds.
During printing Flashes -- -- -- -- 14
Flash 2: Repeats On for 0.5 seconds, Off for 0.5 seconds,
Access point setting error Flashes at On for 0.5 seconds, and Off for 1.0 second.
-- -- -- -- 14
(Security key exchange) high speed Flash 3: Repeats Off for 0.5 seconds, On for 0.5 seconds,
Access point setting error Off for 0.5 seconds, and On for 1.0 second.
-- -- -- -- Flashes 14
(General) Flash 4: Repeats On for 2.0 seconds and Off for 0.5 seconds.
Access point setting error Flash at high speed: Repeats turning On and Off every 0.5 seconds.
-- -- -- -- Flashes 14
(Registration) Flashes alternately 1: Same as the “Flash”
Access point setting error Flashes alternately 2: Repeats turning Off and On every 1.25 seconds.
-- -- -- -- Flashes 14
(PINCODE authentication)
Success Wireless LAN
-- -- -- -- ON*2 14
setting
Cannot set Wireless LAN -- -- -- -- Flashes 14
During push-button setting Flashes Flashes
-- -- -- 14
alternately2 alternately1
During PINCODE setting Flashes Flashes
-- -- -- simultaneou simultaneou 14
sly sly
During receiving data Flashes -- -- Flashes -- 14

SC-P400 Series Features 203

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

9.3 Errors/Fatal Errors and Remedies Error Contents Remedies

Cleaning after black ink Replace the black ink cartridge with the
 Errors & Remedies Ink Color error*3 replacement cannot be one used before the error, or the one that
performed. has sufficient amount of ink.
Error Contents Remedies Access point setting Error has occurred by Executes access point setting again.
Fatal error A mechanical error has error (Security key exchanging security
Turn the power Off and back it On. exchange) key to access point.
occurred.
Maintenance request Waste ink pads need to Replace the waste ink pads and reset the Access point setting Error has occurred Executes access point setting again.
error (General) during setting Wireless
be replaced. counter. LAN to access point.
CDR guide error The CDR tray base Close the CDR tray base. Access point setting Registration error has Executes access point setting again.
was opened when error (Registration) occurred by registering
receiving or printing a to access point.
ASF print job.
Access point setting Error has occurred by Executes access point setting again.
The CDR tray base Open the CDR tray base. error (PINCODE failure of PINCODE
was closed when authentication) authentication during
receiving or printing a setting Wireless LAN
CDR print job. to access point.
Paper jam A paper jam has <When printing on paper> Cannot set Wireless When sets Wireless Disconnects Wired LAN, and executes
occurred. Remove the jammed paper and press LAN LAN, Wired LAN is access point setting again.
the Paper button.*1 connected.
<When printing on CDR>
Remove the jammed CDR tray and Note : For detail of remedy, please refer to Troubleshooting according to Error Messages
press the Paper button. (p.36).
No paper Failed to feed paper Load paper correctly and press the Note *1: When the CDR tray base is opened, close the CDR tray base and press the Paper
Paper button.*1 button.
Multi-feed Multiple sheets of Press the Paper button to eject the *2: When the CDR tray has been inserted, remove the CDR tray and press the Ink
paper were fed at the multiple sheets.*1 button.
same time.
*3: For SC-P400 Series, replace Matte Black ink cartridge.
Ink-out The cartridge has run Replace the cartridge with a new one.*2
out of ink.
No ink cartridge Ink cartridge(s) was not Replace the cartridge with a new one.*2
detected.
Wrong ink cartridge Incorrect ink Replace the cartridge with the correct
cartridge(s) was one.*2
detected.
Paper path error The paper was loaded Eject the fed paper and press the Paper
in a different way from button after loading paper in the
the specified one. specified way.
Cover open error Printing was executed Close the printer cover.
with the printer cover
open.

SC-P400 Series Errors/Fatal Errors and Remedies 204

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

 Fatal error & Remedies Error

Error Contents Failed Parts/Remedies
Code
Error DC error (PF) PF PID excess load F1H Encoder sensor failure (contaminated/
Error Contents Failed Parts/Remedies
Code error detached scale, encoder board failure),
DC error CR PID excess load F9H Encoder sensor failure (contaminated/ PF Motor failure, overload error (paper
(CR) error detached scale, encoder board failure), jam/foreign object), cable
CR motor failure, overload error (paper disconnection
jam/foreign object), cable PF PID excess speed F2H Encoder sensor failure (contaminated/
disconnection error detached scale, encoder board failure),
CR PID excess speed FAH Encoder sensor failure (contaminated/ motor driver failure (Main board
error detached scale, encoder board failure), failure), tooth skip of the timing belt,
motor driver failure (Main board improper tension of the timing belt
failure), tooth skip of the timing belt, PF PID reverse error F3H Encoder sensor failure (contaminated/
improper tension of the timing belt detached scale, encoder board failure),
CR PID reverse error FBH Encoder sensor failure (contaminated/ tooth skip of the timing belt, improper
detached scale, encoder board failure), tension of the timing belt, paper jam
tooth skip of the timing belt, improper PF PID lock error F4H Encoder sensor failure (contaminated/
tension of the timing belt, paper jam detached scale, encoder board failure),
CR PID lock error FCH Encoder sensor failure (contaminated/ PF Motor failure, overload error (paper
detached scale, encoder board failure), jam/foreign object), cable
CR motor failure, overload error (paper disconnection
jam/foreign object), cable PF PID speed fall F5H Encoder sensor failure (contaminated/
disconnection error detached scale, encoder board failure),
DC error CR PID speed fall FDH Encoder sensor failure (contaminated/ PF Motor failure, overload error (paper
(CR) error detached scale, encoder board failure), jam/foreign object), cable
motor driver failure (Main board disconnection
failure), tooth skip of the timing belt, PF excess load error F6H Encoder sensor failure (contaminated/
improper tension of the timing belt, detached scale, encoder board failure),
paper jam PF Motor failure, overload error (paper
CR excess load error FEH Encoder sensor failure (contaminated/ jam/foreign object), cable
detached scale, encoder board failure), disconnection
CR motor failure, overload error (paper
jam/foreign object), cable
disconnection

SC-P400 Series Errors/Fatal Errors and Remedies 205

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Error Error
Error Contents Failed Parts/Remedies Error Contents Failed Parts/Remedies
Code Code
Motor drive CR (PID) driving D1H Main board failure Sequence CR home position 50H Paper jam, foreign object, deformation
time error time over error error seek error of the main frame
PF (PID) driving time D3H Main board failure CR unlock 51H Paper jam, foreign object, deformation
over error confirmation error of the main frame
ASF driving time D5H Main board failure CR lock reset 52H Paper jam, foreign object, deformation
over error confirmation error of the mainframe
PUMP driving time D6H Main board failure PF/ASF reset error 53H ASF sensor failure, ASF motor failure
over error
LD Roller reset error 54H ASF sensor failure, ASF motor failure
APG driving time D7H Main board failure
Sensor error PW Sensor failure 60H PW sensor failure, Main board failure
over error
error
Factory Error due to EERPM 30H -
PW Sensor foreign 61H PW sensor failure, Main board failure
command verify command
object detection error
error
CDR Sensor 62H Failure of the sensor for the front tray
Printhead Transistor 40H Main board failure
error temperature error APG error APG specified 70H APG Unit failure (APG sensor failure,
X-Hot detect error 41H Printhead failure, Main board failure position drive error APG motor failure)
before printing start APG reset error 71H APG Unit failure (APG sensor failure,
X-Hot detect error 42H Printhead failure, Main board failure APG motor failure)
after flushing APG drive error due 72H -
Head temperature 43H Printhead failure, Main board failure to factory commands
error Mechanism Mechanism Unit 73H Mechanism Unit failure.
Head error 44H Communication error between Unit error abnormal error [Remedies]
Printhead and Main board has occurred
1. Cleaning in the printer (Paper dust,
[Remedies] smeared with ink) (p.164)
1. Update the Firmware. 2. Replace the Printer Mechanism
2. Confirm the connection with Head (p.98)
FFCs. Ink device Ink device error B0-CFH Ink cartridge failure, CSIC terminal
3. Replace the Printhead, Head FFC error failure, CR contact module failure,
or Main board. Main board failure
Circuit error Circuit error (include 80H Main board failure
blowout of a fuse)

SC-P400 Series Errors/Fatal Errors and Remedies 206

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

 Firmware Update when displays Fatal error 9.4 Disassembly

The firmware of this printer is written in the Flash ROM on the Main board. If
the Main board is replaced, Print head is replaced or the firmware needs to be 9.4.1 Summary
updated, follow the procedure below to write the firmware to the Flash ROM. This section describes changed parts & new parts for SC-P400 Series only. For
assembling of other parts, please refer to the information of Stylus Photo
 Normally Firmware Update
R1900/R2880 or Stylus Photo R2000/R2000s ("4.1.7 Disassembly" (p.77)). In
1. Turn the printer ON in the normal mode.
addition, the caution points are same as Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/
2. write the Firmware to Flash ROM with Epson Firmware Updater. R2000s.
3. The printer is rebooted automatically and returns to ready
status.
 Firmware Update when displays Fatal Error
1. Turn on the printer ON in the F/W Update mode.
Turn the power ON while pressing
[Power] + [Paper] + [Ink] + [Roll Paper] buttons together.
When turn on the [Power LED] + [Paper LED] + [Ink LED],
release the [Ink] button only.
After [Power LED] + [Paper LED] + [Ink LED] flash 3 times, turn
on the [Power LED] only.
2. write the Firmware to Flash ROM with Epson Firmware Updater.
3. Restart the printer after the [Power LED] is flashed.

SC-P400 Series Disassembly 207

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

9.4.2 Procedure of Disassembly

The flowchart below lists the step-by-step disassembly procedures.

Start

Panel FFC Cover Paper Support Assy C H E C K  The boxes shown in a dotted-line are not the shortest
Rear Housing Front Decoration Stacker Assy
(p.79) Plate Left/Right (p.187) (p.78) (p.78) P O IN T procedures, but are necessary to proceed to the next step.
(p.79)
 Since a prototype was used to illustrate these disassembly
Front Decoration
Plate Left/Right Panel Unit Cover Open Sensor and assembly procedures, the appearance of some parts
(p.79) (p.188) (p.138)
may differ from those on an actual product.
Decoration Plate  This section describes the parts of red frame only. For
Left/Right (p.82) other parts, please refer to the procedure of Stylus Photo
R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s.
Panel FFC Cover
(p.187)

Panel Unit
(p.188)

Upper Housing /
Printer Cover (p.83)

Upper Housing PF Encoder High Voltage LED Board APG Assy CR Scale CR Motor Wireless LAN Board Printhead / CSIC
Support Assy (p.85) (p.134) Module (p.89) (p.88) (p.91) (p.92) (p.131) Assy (p.209) Assy (p.94)

Lower Housing / Board assy (Main

Paper EJ Frame board / Power supply CR Scale
Printer Mechanism (p.92)
Assy / Front Cover board) (p.210)
(p.98) / CDR Tray Base
(p.114)
ASF Assy PF Motor Waste Ink Pad / Waste Front Paper Guide LED Board
Ink Tube Left/Right Foot (p.113)
(p.108) (p.132) (p.112) Pad (p.111) (p.88)

PictBridge Holder PE Sensor Holder ASF Motor Front Paper Guide / CDR Release CDR Sensor APG Assy
Assy (p.113) (p.137) (p.133) Paper EJ Roller / Front Lever Sub Assy (p.136) (p.91)
Paper Guide Pad Tray (p.116)
(p.121)
Release Holder Carriage Shaft /
Assy (p.127) Carriage Unit (p.100)
PF Encoder Ink System Unit
(p.134) (p.118)
FLAG Release CR Encoder
PW sensor (p.135) (p.134)
Assy (p.128)
Upper Paper Guide
Assys (p.129)
PE Sensor Holder
(p.137)
PF Roller Shaft
(p.124)
Upper Paper Guide
Assys (p.129)

SC-P400 Series Disassembly 208

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

 Wireless LAN Board Assy

 When installing the wireless LAN board assy, first insert the
1. Remove the C.B.P. M3 x 8 screw that secures the earth plate of the wireless hook on the wireless LAN board assy into the hole on the lower
LAN board assy. housing, and then secure the wireless LAN board assy with the
2. Disconnect the wireless LAN board cable from the connector (CN2) on the screw.
main board.
3. Remove the C.B.P. M3 x 10 screw that secures the wireless LAN board
Assy, and remove the wireless LAN board assy.
Hook

Hook hole

 When routing cables, be careful not to let them caught between

the parts. (See Figure 9-3.)
Wireless LAN Board cable

Wireless LAN
board assy

C.B.S 3x8 C.B.P 3x10

High voltage
module cable

Figure 9-3. Remove the wireless LAN board assy

SC-P400 Series Disassembly 209

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

 Board assy (Main board / Power supply board)

 For disassembling the board assy, please refer to4.3.1 Board Assy (Main CN2 CN25
Board/Power Supply Board) (p86).
 Describes the Connector Layout of the main board to the following.
CN12 CN22
Table 9-6. Main Board Connector
CN11 CN9
No. Connector No. Connector
CN2 Wireless LAN Board CN14 Head FFC CN4 CN14
CN4 Panel Board, CDR Sensor, Cover CSIC CN6 CN13
CN22
Open Sensor
CN5 CN117
CN5 Relay FFC (for sensor) CN25 High voltage module
CN6 LED board CN115 CR motor CN118 CN115
CN9 CR encoder sensor, PW sensor CN116 PF motor CN116 CN119
CN11 Head FFC CN117 Pump motor
CN12 Head FFC CN118 APG motor
CN13 Head FFC CN119 ASF motor

Figure 9-4. Connector layout

SC-P400 Series Disassembly 210

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

9.5 Adjustment
9.5.1 Overview
This section explains the adjustment items for SC-P400 Series.

9.5.2 Servicing Adjustment Item List

The items, purposes and outlines of the adjustment program are given in the following table.
Table 9-7. Servicing Adjustment Item List
Adjustment Purpose Method Outline Remarks
Main PF belt tension Adjust the belt tension of PF belt properly to ensure paper For the adjustment procedure, see "5.2.1.1 PF Belt Tension
adjustment adjustment feed accuracy. Adjustment Method" (p.146).

Pf roller shaft center Correct the deflection amount on the PF roller shaft to For the adjustment procedure, see "5.2.3 PF Roller Shaft
support position maintain the appropriate paper feed amount. Center Support Position Adjustment" (p.151).
adjustment
ASF guide roller LDs To prevent the paper feed accuracy from being lowered For the adjustment procedure, see "5.2.5 ASF Guide Roller
position adjustment due to variation of assembling accuracy when installing LDs Position Adjustment" (p.161).
the ASF Guide Roller LDs, aligns the installation position
of ASF Guide Roller LDs and optimizes the relative
positions of the LD roller Shaft and the Retard Roller.

PG adjustment Maintains the distance between the Printhead surface and For the adjustment procedure, see "5.2.2 PG Adjustment"
the Paper Guide Front (Platen) correctly and adjusts the (p.147).
parallelism on the 0-digit and the 130-digit sides to
stabilize the print quality.
EEPROM data copy Reads out the necessary information from the EEPROM 1. Select this function in the adjustment program.
on the defective main board using the D4 function, and 2. Read out the data from the defective board.
then write it to the new board to reduce the related
3. After replacing the board with a new one, write the read
adjustment items required after replacing the Main Board.
data to the new board.

Initial setting After replacing the main board, writes information 1. Select this function in the adjustment program. Carry this out only if the
necessary for Main Boards (initial settings, product serial 2. Input the necessary information and write it to the new EEPROM backup has failed
No., MAC address) board. when replacing the main board.

SC-P400 Series Adjustment 211

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 9-7. Servicing Adjustment Item List

Adjustment Purpose Method Outline Remarks
Main Head ID input When replacing the printhead, reduces head 1. Select this function in the adjustment program.
adjustment manufacturing variations, which may cause individual 2. Enter the ID of the Head QR Code Label (29 digits) applied
differences in print quality. on the printhead.

Head angular Corrects the error in the printhead mounting position 1. Select this function in the adjustment program. The correction value is not
adjustment (head angle) on a software basis to maintain the print 2. Print the pattern and check the misalignment, and then reflected in the reprinted
quality. enter the number of the least misaligned pattern (band, pattern even if the selected
raster offset) number is entered.
Bi-d adjustment Corrects the print timing in the go and return paths in bi- 1. Select this function in the adjustment program. If you enter the selected
directional printing. 2. Print the pattern and enter the number of the pattern number and print the pattern
without any lines on the block. again, the pattern with the
selected number comes in the
center.
PW adjustment Corrects the PW sensor mounting position on a software 1. Select this function in the adjustment program.
basis to improve the error in paper detection caused by the 2. Enter the number of the patterns 5 mm away from each
variation of the mounting position. edge.
3. Enter the number of pattern that overlaps on the vertical
line on the left in the first dot position box.

PF/EJ adjustment When the actual paper feed amount differs greatly from 1. Select this function in the adjustment program.
the theoretical value due to paper slip, PF roller 2. Print the pattern and enter the number of the pattern
tolerances, etc. when feeding paper during printing. without any lines on the block.

CR motor heat Measures and corrects the electrical variation of the CR 1. Select this function in the adjustment program.
protection control motor and the power supply board. 2. The variations are measured and the measurement values
are written to the EEPROM on the Main Board
automatically.
3. Restart the printer.
PF motor heat Measures and corrects the electrical variation of the PF 1. Select this function in the adjustment program.
protection control motor and the power supply board. 2. Correction value is automatically calculated and written in
the main board.
Factory settings Configures the settings for cleaning to be carried out at the 1. Select this function in the adjustment program.
next power-on. Also, deletes the fatal error history. 2. Carry out the adjustment.

SC-P400 Series Adjustment 212

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 9-7. Servicing Adjustment Item List

Adjustment Purpose Method Outline Remarks
Main Mist recovery check Checks whether the voltage supplied from the high 1. Select this function in the adjustment program. Make sure to use high voltage
adjustment voltage module is appropriate. 2. Using the tester, measure the voltage between the frame probes.
(near 130 digit side) and the screw securing the electrode
cable to confirm the measured voltage falls within the
range of 240V to 500V. (For the location of the screw
securing the electrode cable, see Figure 4-62. (p98).)

CR encoder check Confirms the encoder works normally without any error 1. Select this function in the adjustment program.
due to such as scratches or dirt on the CR scale. 2. Carries out the adjustment automatically.
3. Restart the printer.
PF encoder check Confirms the encoder works normally without any error 1. Select this function in the adjustment program.
due to such as scratches or dirt on the PF scale. 2. Carries out the adjustment automatically.
APG check Confirms the set PG position returns to the origin position 1. Select this function in the adjustment program.
by rotating the APG motor and changes the PG position. 2. Confirm the [--] of the gear is on the lower most position,
and then operate the APG from the program.
3. After the APG operation, check whether the [--] of the gear
is properly back on the lower most position.

Maintenance Head cleaning Cleans the nozzle surface to make the ink discharge from 1. Select this function in the adjustment program.
function the printhead normally. 2. Select from CL1, CL2, or CL3 depending on the state of
nozzle clogging and carry it out.

Ink charge This function is used for printhead replacement to drain 1. Select this function in the adjustment program.
Shipping Liquid of the after-sales service part in the head 2. Carry out the ink charge.
flow path and simultaneously to fill ink in the head flow
path to make all nozzles printable and stabilize the ink in
the printhead.

Waste ink pad counter Reads and resets the waste ink counters. 1. Select this function in the adjustment program. Make sure to replace the waste
2. Reset the waste ink pad counter. ink pads on both the 0 digit
side and the 130 digit side.
Initialize PF The deterioration amount of the PF roller shaft is reflected 1. Select this function in the adjustment program.
deterioration offset to the paper feed correction amount. Every time a sheet of 2. Reset the PF deterioration offset counter.
paper is fed, the deterioration amount is counted on the
basis of the original counter value setting. When the PF
roller shaft or printer mechanism has been replaced, reset
this counter.

SC-P400 Series Adjustment 213

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 9-7. Servicing Adjustment Item List

Adjustment Purpose Method Outline Remarks
Maintenance Disable PF Carry out this adjustment when the EEPROM cannot be 1. Select this function in the adjustment program.
function deterioration offset backed up during replacing the main board. To reduce the 2. Write the maximum value into the PF deterioration
ancillary work in servicing, enter the maximum value (a compensation counter.
value for which deterioration compensation is not made).

Initialize front tray Initializes this counter so as not to feed the media too 1. Select this function in the adjustment program.
print counter much after the PF roller is replaced because the correction 2. Reset the front tray print counter.
value is added to the PF roller rotation in the paper feed
direction by printing from the front tray (printing on a CD/
DVD or card board).

Disable front tray print Carry out this adjustment when the EEPROM cannot be 1. Select this function in the adjustment program.
counter backed up during replacing the main board. To reduce the 2. Write the maximum value into the front tray print counter.
ancillary work in servicing, enter the maximum value (a
value for which deterioration compensation is not made).

Colorimetric Adjusts the amount of ink to be discharged. For the adjustment procedure, see "9.5.4.1 Colorimetric
calibration calibration" (p.218).
Additional Final check pattern Checks whether the adjustment result is properly reflected 1. Select this function in the adjustment program.
functions print by printing a pattern. 2. Select the pattern and print it.
EEPROM dump Reads out the EEPROM data for analysis of trouble. 1. Select this function in the adjustment program.
2. Acquire the EEPROM data and save it in a file.
Printer information Displays the printer information necessary for 1. Select this function in the adjustment program.
check troubleshooting. 2. Read out the saved EEPROM data and display the
information.
Paper path test Check if the paper is fed normally by feeding sheets. 1. Select this function in the adjustment program.
2. Enter the number of sheets to be fed and carry out the test.

SC-P400 Series Adjustment 214

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

9.5.3 Required Adjustments

The table below lists the required adjustments depending upon the parts being repaired or replaced. Find the part(s) you removed or replaced, and check which
adjustment(s) must be carried out. About the first dot position adjustment, it's included in the PW adjustment.

Table 9-8. Required adjustment list

CR motor heat protection control

Initialize front tray print counter

PF motor heat protection control

Initialize PF deterioration offset

Disable front tray print counter

Disable PF deterioration offset

Support position adjustment

PG adjustment (Mecha adj.)

PF belt tension adjustment

Head angular adjustment

Final check pattern print

Colorimetric calibration
Waste ink pad counter
EEPROM data copy
PF Roller Shaft Center

Mist recovery check

ASF guide roller LDs

CR encoder check

PF/EJ adjustment
PF encoder check
position adjustment

Bi-d adjustment

Factory settings
PW adjustment
Head ID input
Initial setting
F/W update

APG check
Ink charge
Main board Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 2
Replace
--- --- --- 1 2 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 3 4
(Read OK)
Replace
--- --- --- 1 --- 2 --- --- 3 --- --- --- --- --- --- 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
(Read NG)
PS board Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 2
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 2 3 4 5
CR motor Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 2
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- 2 3
High voltage Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 2
module Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 2 3
Printhead Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 2 3 4 --- --- --- --- 5 6
Replace --- --- --- 1 --- --- --- 2 3 4 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 5 6 7 --- --- --- 8 9 10
CR scale Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 2 3
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 2 3
APG assy Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 2 3
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 2 3
PF encoder Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 2 3
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 2 3

SC-P400 Series Adjustment 215

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 9-8. Required adjustment list

CR motor heat protection control

Initialize front tray print counter

PF motor heat protection control

Initialize PF deterioration offset

Disable front tray print counter

Disable PF deterioration offset

Support position adjustment

PG adjustment (Mecha adj.)

PF belt tension adjustment

Head angular adjustment

Final check pattern print

Colorimetric calibration
Waste ink pad counter
EEPROM data copy
PF Roller Shaft Center

Mist recovery check

ASF guide roller LDs

CR encoder check

PF/EJ adjustment
PF encoder check
position adjustment

Bi-d adjustment

Factory settings
PW adjustment
Head ID input
Initial setting
F/W update

APG check
Ink charge
Carriage shaft Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 2 3 4 --- 5 --- --- 6 7
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 2 3 4 --- 5 --- --- 6 7
Carriage unit Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 2 3 4 --- --- --- --- 5 6
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 2 3 4 --- --- --- --- 5 6
CR encoder Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- --- --- 2 --- --- --- --- --- 3 4 5 --- --- --- --- 6 7
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- --- --- 2 --- --- --- --- --- 3 4 5 --- --- --- --- 6 7
PW sensor Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 2 3 4 --- --- --- --- 5 6
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 2 3 4 --- --- --- --- 5 6
Printer Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 2
mechanism Replace 2 3 --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- 4 5 7 8 6 --- --- --- 9 10 11 12 13 14 --- 15 16
PF motor Remove 1 --- 2 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 3 --- --- --- 4 5
Replace 1 --- 2 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 3 --- 4 --- 5 6
Waste ink pad Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 2
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 2 3
ASF assy Remove --- *1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- 2 3
Replace --- 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 2 --- --- --- --- --- --- 3 4
Paper EJ Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- 2 --- --- --- 3 4
frame assy Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- 2 --- --- --- 3 4
Front paper Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- 2 --- --- --- 3 4
guide/Paper Replace
eject roller --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- 2 --- --- --- 3 4

PF roller shaft Remove 2 --- 3 --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 4 --- --- 5 --- 6 --- 7 8
Replace 2 --- 3 --- --- --- --- 1 --- --- 4 5 --- --- --- --- --- --- 6 --- --- 7 --- 8 --- 9 10

SC-P400 Series Adjustment 216

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Note "*1" :When only removing the ASF assy, you do not need to perform the adjustment. In that case, mark the installing positions before removing them, and make sure to align the markings when
installing. See "4.4.6 ASF Assy" (p.108).
"*2" :Replacing the waste ink tray assy is necessary when resetting waste ink pad counter.
"*3":When only removing the carriage shaft, you do not need to perform the adjustment. In that case, mark on the parallelism adjust bushing (left/right) before removing them, and make sure to
align the markings when installing. See "4.4.5 Carriage Shaft / Carriage Unit" (p.100).

C A U T IO N  When the EEPROM data copy cannot be made for the main board that needs to be replaced, the waste ink tray assy must be replaced after replacing
the main board with a new one.
 After all required adjustments are completed, use the “Final check pattern print” function to print all adjustment patterns for final check. If you find
a problem with the printout patterns, carry out the adjustment again.
 When using a new main board for replacing the printer mechanism, the Initial setting must have been made to the main board.
 Install the latest Firmware before replace the Printhead. If the installation is not executed, a fatal error may occur. When occur the fatal error, install
the latest Firmware. See Firmware Update when displays Fatal Error(p.207)

SC-P400 Series Adjustment 217

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

9.5.4 Adjustment Procedure Table 9-9. Tools for Colorimetric Calibration

Tools Purpose / Specification
9.5.4.1 Colorimetric calibration Premium Glossy Photo Paper For using as a background of the color chart
during scanning (only when a backing board is
OVERVIEW OF THE COLORIMETRIC CALIBRATION not attached to calibrator).
Two USB cables For connecting printer and calibrator to PC with
 Purpose two USB cables.
It can make revision values which adjust printing color of user’s printer
and SEC standard unit equally. For SC-P400 Series, the colorimetric Note "*": It is downloaded automatically if connected to the network when a PC starts EPSON
calibration can be done in the service mode only. ColorBase2.

The following parts have an influence on ink discharge, therefore revision is i1Pro calibrator / accessories
necessary after part exchange.
• Printhead
• Main board
• Power board
This revision values are applied to the EPSON genuine printer driver. Calibrator Scanning ruler White reference tile

 Tools i1Pro2 calibrator / accessories

Table 9-9. Tools for Colorimetric Calibration
Tools Purpose / Specification
Plain paper (A4/Letter) For checking the nozzles.
Ultra Premium Presentation Paper Matte For printing the calibration chart.
Enhanced Matte Paper, Archival Matte
Paper
(A4/Letter)
Colorimetric Calibration application EPSON ColorBase2 Calibrator
Backing board
PC OS: refer to Table 9-10.
The following files must be installed on the PC:
- Printer driver for the model to be adjusted
- Adobe AIR Runtime*
Calibrator X-Rite i1Pro (with UV filter) or i1Pro2
White reference tile Accessory of calibrator
Scanning ruler Accessory of calibrator
White reference tile Scanning ruler
Backing board Accessory of calibrator
Figure 9-5. Calibrator and accessories

SC-P400 Series Adjustment 218

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 9-10. Support OS of EPSON ColorBase2  Flow of the Colorimetric Calibration

OS* bit The following steps show the Colorimetric Calibration:
32
Windows XP SP3 1. Print a nozzle check pattern. If there is nozzle missing, run a head cleaning.
64
2. Print a color chart with the printer which you want to calibrate via
Windows 7 SP1 or later 32/64 ColorBase2.
Windows 8 / 8.1 32/64
3. Scan the printed color chart with a calibrator.
Note "*": Mac OS is not supported.
4. ColorBase2 calculates a Color ID from the scanning result and calculation
 Calibration principle parameter of the colorimetric calibration.
Measuring a color chart print result (ink discharge amount) in a calibrator. 5. Write the Color ID to the printer. When printing, printer driver refers to the
Created Color ID information based on the obtained color difference values data of the User Color ID area.
(L*, a*, b*) is stored on the printer. When printing, the printer driver takes the
Color ID to correct the number of ink droplets (dot generation rate) for each of
different sized droplets of each colors.
 Correlation with Head ID adjustment
Head ID: In the printhead manufacturing process, ink discharge amount of each
head is actually measured to get individual characteristic information. The
information is the Head ID that was set to revise a characteristic difference
between the heads. The Head ID is shown with a label on the each printhead,
therefore you must input the Head ID to the printer after printhead exchange.

C A U T IO N  Before performing Colorimetric Calibration, the

conventional Head ID must be pre-registered.
 If you do not perform Colorimetric Calibration after
performing Head ID adjustment, the printer will be
controlled only by the Head ID. In that case, the color
precision is not guaranteed.

SC-P400 Series Adjustment 219

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

ADJUSTING METHOD OF THE COLORIMETRIC CALIBRATION C H E C K To enhance the color accuracy, the ink churning is
P O IN T recommended before starting the Colorimetric Calibration.
 Adjusting workflow
Remove the ink cartridges, and shake them four or five times,
The following illustrates the overall workflow. then reinstall them to the printer
 Procedure
START
1. Connect the printer and the calibrator with the PC to which the ColorBase2
Connect the printer and
is installed using USB cables.
calibrator to the PC,
and start the ColorBase2 2. Turn the printer on.
3. Start up the ColorBase2.
Switch to service mode

Print a nozzle check pattern Head cleaning

NG
OK

Select the media / calibrator,

and print the Color Chart.

Dry the Color Chart (5 min.)

Measure the Color Chart.

Convert the color measurement The ColorBase2 performs this

data to Color ID, then write process automatically by clicking
Color ID to the printer. [Active] button.

End

Figure 9-6. Overall work flow

SC-P400 Series Adjustment 220

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

4. Switch to service mode from the main menu screen: Click a point to show 6. Click [Start Calibration] icon in the main menu screen.
in “O” of the Figure 9-7 in the pointer of the mouse in turn.
5. Input “7777” in the “enter password” cell, then click [OK] button (the
password is fixed and cannot change).

1 2

Figure 9-8. Screen of the starting calibration

4 3 C H E C K For SC-P400 Series, the “Applied Calibration Data” list
P O IN T cannot be referred to, because only the service mode is
available for the series.

Figure 9-7. Switching to service mode

SC-P400 Series Adjustment 221

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

7. Click [Nozzle Check] to execute the check. 9. Select the following on the Print Color Chart window.
8. Check the printed nozzle check pattern.  Media Type: Ultra Premium Presentation Paper Matte /
Enhanced Matte Paper, Archival Matter Paper
 When there are broken lines or missing segments  Paper Size: A4 / Letter
Click [Head Cleaning] to execute the cleaning, then reprint a nozzle  Color Measurement Device: i1Pro (UV removal) / i1Pro2
check pattern and check it.
 When there are no broken lines or missing segments
Click [Next] to go to the Print Color Chart screen.

C H E C K  The Next button becomes active after the nozzle check is

P O IN T executed.
 If there are broken lines or missing segments, repeat the
head cleaning until they are eliminated.

Step 7

Figure 9-10. Color chart print setting (1)

Step 8

Figure 9-9. Nozzle Check screen

SC-P400 Series Adjustment 222

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

10. Click [Connection Check] and confirm the communication with the 11. Click the [Print] icon and load a media on the ASF to print the chart.
calibrator is correctly established.
12. When the confirmation dialog is displayed, click [OK].

Figure 9-11. Color chart print setting (2) Figure 9-12. Color chart print setting (3)
C H E C K The recommended temperature range when printing the
P O IN T chart is between 15 to 28 degrees C.

SC-P400 Series Adjustment 223

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Product name, serial no.,

selected black ink, print date

126 calibration patches

Nozzle Check Pattern

Figure 9-13. Color chart image (matte black)

SC-P400 Series Adjustment 224

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

13. Confirm there is no dot missing in the nozzle check pattern on the bottom 15. Confirm the calibrator is connected, click [OK].
of the color chart. If any are found, run a cleaning from the panel menu on
16. Place the calibrator on the white reference tile (white plate) and click [OK].
the printer, and then click [Print again].
14. After drying is complete (after 5 minutes has passed), click [Next] to go to
the measurement window.

Figure 9-15. Preparing the Calibrator

5 min. later C A U T IO N  The white reference tile (white plate) on the calibration
plate should be clean. Clean off any dirt with alcohol or
other organic solvent. Use a soft cloth so as not to
damage the white reference tile (white plate).
 The white reference tile (white plate) and the calibrator
are used as a pair. Do not use any other plate attached
with other calibrators.

C H E C K When setting and measuring the color chart, orient the chart
P O IN T with the letters printed on it to the left.

Active in 5 min.

Figure 9-14. Drying the Chart

SC-P400 Series Adjustment 225

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

17. Place the color chart on the backing board as shown in Figure 9-16 and set the
scanning ruler, and then click [OK]. (Use Premium Glossy Photo Paper instead
if no backing board is available.) i1Pro2 is used for explanation in the
following figures.

Place the chart with the nozzle

check pattern to the right.

Figure 9-17. Preparation for calibration

Measurement start point

Measuring direction

Align the edge of scale with the first

row of the calibration patches.

Figure 9-16. Color chart setting

SC-P400 Series Adjustment 226

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

18. Perform color measurement according to the instruction on the window. Press
C A U T IO N  During color measurement, do not allow the calibrator
and hold the button on the calibrator and wait for one to two seconds, and then
to rub against unmeasured patches on the chart.
keep holding it and slide the calibrator at a steady speed in the measuring
direction from the measurement start point shown in Figure 9-16.  Prevent the ruler and calibrator from coming off the
chart sheet during color measurement. Doing so will
 i1Pro: Slide the calibrator on the calibration patches from left to right in cause incorrect color measurement.
approximately five seconds.
 Do not press the calibrator to the chart too strongly,
 i1Pro2: Slide the calibrator on the calibration patches from left to right in
approximately five seconds, and let go of the button once. And then, otherwise the patch may be damaged.
press and hold the button on the calibrator again, and then keep  If “!” appears repeatedly and the measurement fails
holding it and slide the calibrator on the calibration patches from continuously, the measured color value may be far out of
right to left in approximately five seconds. the standard range. In that case, end the measurement
When the color measurement is successfully complete, " " appears, and and go to the troubleshooting below.
then perform the color measurement on the next row.

Table 9-11. Limitations of the calibrator

i1Pro i1Pro2
Measurement Upper left on the color chart Upper left on the color chart
start point
In the direction of the arrow in  Outward (tungsten light): In
Figure 9-16 only. An error occurs the direction of the arrow in
Measuring if scanned in the reverse Figure 9-16 only.
direction.
direction  Inward (UV light): In the
reverse direction from the
outward scanning
Times of Once Two times (one cycle)
measurements
per row
When the Perform the measurement of the Perform the measurement of the
failed row. Cannot go on to the failed row. Cannot go on to the
measurement next row until the measurement next row until the measurement
fails is successfully complete. is successfully complete.

SC-P400 Series Adjustment 227

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

Table 9-12. Troubleshooting when the measurement fails

Presumable Cause Major Troubleshooting
The adjustment of the printer may After the adjustments that must be done after parts
be insufficient. replacement are all complete, perform the
measurement again.
 The media has deteriorated and Use new Ultra Premium Presentation Paper Matte
discolored. Enhanced Matte Paper or Archival Matte Paper.
 The media was stored in bad
conditions and damaged.
The color or contamination of the  When using the backing board: remove any
backing may be interfering. contamination on the backing board, and then stack
two color charts over on each other and perform the
measurement.
 Measurement without a backing board: Stack the
color chart over on each other on blank (white)
Premium Glossy Photo Paper and perform the
measurement.
Measurement start point
Wrong row/wrong measuring See Figure 9-16 and Table 9-11 and confirm the
direction current row to be measured and the measuring
direction are correct.
Measuring at an angle Align the scale with the chart correctly again, and then
slide the calibrator in parallel to the row to be
measured on the patches.

Figure 9-18. Starting the Color Measurement

SC-P400 Series Adjustment 228

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

19. When the measurement of all the rows is complete, click the [Completed] 20. Click the [Next] button on the color measurement completed window.
button.
21. On the apply calibration data window, click the [Active] button to write the
calibration data to the printer.

Figure 9-19. Color measurement completed

Figure 9-20. Application of correction values

22. End the tool.

SC-P400 Series Adjustment 229

Stylus Photo R1900/R2880/R2000/R2000s/SC-P400 Series Revision I

MAINTENANCE MENU Table 9-13. Details of the maintenance menu

Item Description
To display the maintenance menu, click the [Maintenance] button on the main (1) Main screen button Goes back to the main screen.
screen. (2) Nozzle check button Prints a nozzle check pattern.
Select a cleaning level among CL1, CL2, CL3, and
CL4 and run it. (Level selection available only in the
(3) Head cleaning button
service mode. Basically use CL1, and if not
improved much, raise the level and try again.)
Restore Default Calibration Overwrite the data in the User Color ID area back to
(4)
button the saved data in the Production Color ID area.
x

Figure 9-21. Maintenance menu

SC-P400 Series Adjustment 230